EBS 122 Cum RCD MFG MOC

ORACLE E-BUSINESS SUITE
RELEASE CONTENT DOCUMENT
Manufacturing
Releases 12.1 and 12.2 (inclusive of 12.0.2 – 12.2.13)
Prepared by Oracle E-Business Suite Product Development
Last Updated: June 9, 2023
Copyright © 2011, 2023, Oracle and/or its affiliates.

Table of Contents
1. Disclaimer 1
2. Introduction 2
2.1. Purpose of Document 2
3. New and Changed Features in Oracle In-Memory Cost Management 3
3.1. Oracle In-Memory Cost Management for Discrete Industries and Oracle In-Memory Cost
Management for Process Industries - New Products – 12.1.3 and 12.2 3
3.1.1. Overview 3
3.1.2. Cost Impact Simulator (CIS) 3
3.1.3. Gross Profit Analyzer (GPA) 3
3.1.4. Cost Comparison Tool 4
3.1.5. Cost Planning for Discrete Industries 4
3.1.5.1. Overview 4
3.1.5.2. Flexible Metadata Definition 5
3.1.5.3. Cost Plan 5
3.1.5.4. Smart View Excel Reports 6
3.1.5.5. OBIEE Profitability Dashboard 6
4. New and Changed Features in Cost Management 7
4.1. Oracle Cost Management 7
4.1.1. Release 12.0.4 (RUP4) 7
4.1.1.1. Iterative Periodic Average Costing (IPAC) for Brazil 7
4.1.2. Release 12.1.1 7
4.1.2.1. Iterative Periodic Average Cost Processor 7
4.1.2.2. Global Accounting Engine Forward Port to Subledger Accounting 7
4.1.2.3. Support for Landed Cost Management 8
4.1.3. Release 12.1.2 8
4.1.3.1. EMEA Joint Project - Inventory Master Book Report 8
4.1.3.2. SLA Post Down-time Upgrade as Concurrent Programs 8
4.1.4. Release 12.1.3 9
4.1.4.1. Encumbrance Accounting for Purchase Orders with Shop Floor Destination 9
4.1.5. Release 12.2.6 9
4.1.5.1. Landed Cost Management support for Project Manufacturing Organizations 9
4.1.1. Release 12.2.7 9
4.1.1.1. Support for Accrual Reconciliation of Consigned Inventories 9
4.1.2. Release 12.2.9 10
4.1.2.1. Item Sub-Elemental Cost Track 10
4.1.3. Release 12.2.10 10
4.1.3.1. Enhanced IPV Transfer to Inventory 10
4.1.4. Release 12.2.11 10
4.1.4.1. Costing Support for IR-ISO Returns 10
4.1.4.2. Costing Support for Centralized Procurement to Expense Destinations with Project & Task 10
4.1.5. Release 12.2.12 10
4.1.5.1. Costing of IR-ISO Returns with Intransit Support 10
4.1.5.1. Costing of IR-ISO Cancellation 10
4.1.5.2. Costing Support for Interorg Transfer of Consigned Material 11
4.1.6. Release 12.2.13 11
4.1.6.1. Costing of Partial IR-ISO Cancellation 11
4.1.6.2. Costing of Interorg Cancellation 11
4.1.6.1. Improved Logging for Accrual Reconciliation Load Run 11
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document ii
4.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management 11
4.2.1. Overview 11
4.2.2. Features 12
4.2.2.1. Maintain Process and Discrete Costing Applications 12
4.2.2.2. Costing of Transfers between Discrete and Process Inventory Organizations 12
4.2.2.3. Subledger Accounting replaces MAC 12
4.2.3. Release 12.0.3 (RUP3) 13
4.2.3.1. OPM Financials: Detailed Subsidiary Ledger Report 13
4.2.3.2. OPM Financials: Non-Recoverable Taxes Support in Actual Costing 13
4.2.3.3. OPM Financials: Reconciliation Enhancements in Actual Costing 13
4.2.4. Release 12.1.1 13
4.2.4.1. Costed Indented Bill of Materials Report 13
4.2.5. Release 12.1.2 14
4.2.5.1. Support for Landed Cost Management 14
4.2.6. Release 12.2.5 15
4.2.6.1. Costing and Accounting for Outside Processing 15
4.2.7. Release 12.2.7 15
4.2.7.1. Support for Accrual Reconciliation of Consigned Inventories 15
4.2.8. Release 12.2.9 16
4.2.8.1. Ability to track Batch Close Variances at Item or Resource Level 16
4.2.8.2. Early Period Close for Process Organizations 16
4.2.9. Release 12.2.10 16
4.2.9.1. Support for costing and accounting of cross period RMAs at Shipping Cost 16
4.2.10. Release 12.2.11 16
4.2.10.1. Support for running multiple instances of Actual Cost Processor 16
4.2.11. Release 12.2.12 16
4.2.11.1. Purge and Archive of Cost Period Data 16
4.2.12. Release 12.2.13 16
4.2.12.1. Purge and Archive of Accounting Data 16
4.2.13. Terminology 17
4.3. Cost Management Command Center 18
4.3.1. Overview 18
4.3.2. Release 12.2.8+ 18
4.3.2.1. Overview Dashboard 18
4.3.2.2. Inventory Dashboard 18
4.3.2.3. Receiving Dashboard 18
4.3.2.4. Manufacturing Dashboard 18
4.3.2.5. Enterprise Asset Management Dashboard 18
4.3.3. Release 12.2.10+ 19
4.3.3.1. Valuation Dashboard 19
4.3.4. Release 12.2.11+ 19
4.3.4.1. Margin Analysis Dashboard 19
4.3.5. Release 12.2.12+ 19
4.3.5.1. Margin Analysis for Process Costing Organization 19
4.4. Oracle Cost Management Information Discovery 20
4.4.1. Overview 20
4.4.2. Support Update 21
5. New and Changed Features in Oracle Quality 23
5.1. Oracle Quality 23
5.1.1. Release 12.1.1 23
5.1.1.1. Quality Workbench Performance Improvements 23
5.1.1.2. Quality Workbench Usability Improvements 23
5.1.1.3. Shop Floor Device and Test Equipment Integration 24
5.1.2. Release 12.2.9 24
5.1.2.1. Render Partially Accepted/Rejected Quantities in Skip Lot Inquiry Page 24
5.1.2.1. New Public API to create collection elements 24
5.1.3. Release 12.2.10 24
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document iii
5.1.3.1. Import Parent-Child hierarchical quality data through Quality Collections Import program 24
5.1.3.2. Enhanced quality results search using Quality Element Prompt 24
5.1.4. Release 12.2.11 25
5.1.4.1. Integrating the standard Quality workbench UI with the EAM Transactions 25
5.1.4.2. Support for Online Actions and Parent – Child relationship in EAM 25
5.1.4.3. Public API to Delete Quality Results 25
5.1.4.4. ERES functionality in the quality workbench 25
5.1.5. Release 12.2.12 25
5.1.5.1. Support for ERES functionality in the Quality Workbench 25
5.1.6. Release 12.2.13 25
5.1.6.1. Deferred E-Signature support for Quality Collection Plan 25
5.1.6.2. JET based Quality Charts 25
5.1.6.1. Skiplot and Sampling support in Receiving OA page 25
5.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Quality Management 25
5.2.1. Overview 25
5.2.2. Features 26
5.2.2.1. Converged Inventory Modifications to OPM Quality 26
5.2.2.2. Enhanced Receiving Inspection 26
5.2.2.3. Copying Quality Specifications 27
5.2.2.4. Corrective Action Request and Tracking 27
5.2.3. Release 12.2.5 27
5.2.3.1. Internal Order Support 27
5.2.1. Release 12.2.7 27
5.2.1.1. Time Based Sampling Support 27
5.2.2. Release 12.2.9 27
5.2.2.1. Parallel Approver Support 27
5.2.3. Release 12.2.11 27
5.2.3.1. Support for Distributed Sampling 27
5.2.3.1. Public API to Draw Samples 28
5.2.3.1. Quality Sample Workflow notifications upon batch completion 28
5.2.3.1. Automatic cancellation of sample group upon cancellation of all child samples 28
5.2.4. Release 12.2.12 28
5.2.4.1. Support Device Integration with Laboratory Instruments to Read Quality Results 28
5.2.5. Release 12.2.13 28
5.2.5.1. Tester skill validation for a Test / Test method 28
5.2.5.2. Support for sample kits for a Test / Test method 28
5.2.5.1. Equipment calibration and certification for quality test evaluation 28
5.2.5.1. Support for sampling plan as per ISO standards 28
5.2.6. Product Dependencies 29
5.3. Oracle Quality Command Center 29
5.3.1. Overview 29
5.3.2. Release 12.2.9++ 29
5.3.2.1. Collection Results Dashboard 29
5.3.2.2. Nonconformances Dashboard 30
5.3.2.1. Corrective Actions Dashboard 30
5.3.3. Release 12.2.10+ 30
5.3.3.1. Sample Inspection Dashboard 30
5.3.3.1. Sample Analysis Dashboard 30
5.3.4. Release 12.2.11+ 30
5.3.4.1. Track and Trace Dashboard 30
5.3.4.1. Assign Resource pop-up action in Sample Inspection dashboard 31
5.3.4.2. Navigate from Sample Inspection and Sample Analysis dashboards to Genealogy & Trace dashboard31
5.3.5. Release 12.2.12+ 31
5.3.5.1. Reorganization of Collection Results and Nonconformance dashboard pages 31
5.3.5.2. Navigation into Collection Results dashboard from Enterprise Asset Management Command Center31
5.4. Oracle Quality Information Discovery 31
Support Update 31
5.4.1.1. 360 Degree View of all Quality Information 32
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document iv
5.4.1.2. Advanced Search on Quality Data 32
5.5. Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite 33
5.5.1. Discontinuation Notice 33
5.5.2. Overview 33
5.5.3. Mobile Release 5.0 – Client Version 1.4.2 34
5.5.3.1. Mobile Foundation Release 5.0 Updates 34
5.5.5.1. 3.6.5.1. Mobile Foundation Release 7.0 Updates 35
5.6. Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite 35
5.6.2. Overview 35
6. New and Changed Features in Outsourced Manufacturing 37
6.1. Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing 37
6.1.1. Overview 37
6.1.2. Release 12.1.1 37
6.1.2.1. Buy/Sell Subcontracting 37
6.1.3. Release 12.1.3.4 38
6.1.3.1. Full Outsourcing 38
6.1.4. Release 12.2.5 39
6.1.4.1. Outsourcing to Internal Organizations (Internal Toll Manufacturing) 39
6.1.4.2. Configure (CTO/ATO) and Outsource Configured Assemblies 40
6.1.4.3. Lot and/or Serial Genealogy 40
6.1.4.4. Terminology 40
6.1.5. Release 12.2.6 40
6.1.5.1. Enhanced Allocation and Adjustment Processing 40
6.1.5.2. Other Enhancements 41
6.1.5.3. Endeca Information Discovery Enhancements 41
6.1.6. Release 12.2.8 41
6.1.6.1. Full Outsourcing Support for Process Manufacturing 41
6.1.6.2. Outsource Manufacturing Information Discovery Support for Process Manufacturing Organizations 42
6.1.7. Release 12.2.10 42
6.1.7.1. Group all the components of a Subcontract Purchase Order into a single Replenishment Purchase Order
and a single Replenishment Sales Order 42
6.1.7.2. Enhanced setup diagnostics to support internal toll and full outsource for process manufacturing 43
6.2. Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center 43
6.2.1. Overview 43
6.2.2. Release 12.2.8+ 43
6.2.2.1. Order Status Dashboard 43
6.2.2.2. Financials Dashboard 43
6.2.3. Release 12.2.9+ 44
6.2.3.1. Conditional formatting of metrics in Order Status dashboard 44
6.2.3.2. Wildcard search in refinements of Order Status and Financials Dashboards 44
6.2.3.3. Default sort criteria in the Results Table 44
6.2.4. Release 12.2.9++ 44
6.2.4.1. Support for saved search 44
6.2.4.2. Export the results table in csv format 44
6.2.4.1. Compare the records of results table 44
6.2.5. Release 12.2.10+ 44
6.2.5.1. Load subcontract order data based on profile 44
6.2.6. Release 12.2.11+ 44
6.2.6.1. Track and Trace Dashboard 44
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document v
6.2.7. Release 12.2.12 45
6.2.7.1. View Timeline in Order Status Dashboard 45
6.2.8. Release 12.2.12+ 45
6.2.8.1. Track & Trace Subcontract Order Execution using Timeline Viewer 45
6.3. Outsourced Information Discovery 45
Support Update 45
6.3.1.1. 360 Degree View of Outsourced Manufacturing Business 46
7. New and Changed Features in Discrete Manufacturing 47
7.1. Oracle Bills of Materials 47
7.1.1. Release 12.2.11 47
7.1.1.1. Public APIs for resource definition 47
7.1.1.2. Public APIs for resources and resource instances definition under department 47
7.1.1.3. Public APIs for standard operation definition 47
7.1.1.4. Public APIs for setup standard operation definition 47
7.1.1.5. Schedule multiple resources in parallel in standard operation 47
7.1.1.6. Public API for transferring engineering items to Manufacturing 47
7.1.2. Release 12.2.12 47
7.1.2.1. Allow Dual UOM Enabled Items as Assembly and Components in Bills of Material 47
7.1.3. Release 12.2.13 48
7.1.3.1. Mass change resources in Routings using public API 48
7.2. Oracle Bills of Material Command Center 48
7.2.1. Overview 48
7.2.2. Release 12.2.11+ 48
7.2.2.1. Bills Dashboard 48
7.2.2.1. Indented Bills Dashboard 48
7.2.2.2. Change Orders Dashboard 49
7.2.3. Release 12.2.12 49
7.2.3.1. Item Revision and Additional Attributes Included in Dashboards 49
7.2.3.2. View Timeline in Change Orders Dashboard 49
7.2.3.3. Support Sequential Data Load to Load Data in all Dashboards 49
7.2.4. Release 12.2.12+ 49
7.2.4.1. Navigation links provided across dashboard pages 49
7.2.4.2. Tooltips for timeline events in the Change Orders dashboard 50
7.3. Oracle Work In Process 50
7.3.1. Release 12.2.4 50
7.3.1.1. Support for Contingent Worker 50
7.3.1. Release 12.2.9 50
7.3.1.1. View On-hand Quantity across subinventories during Material Issue Transactions 50
7.3.1.2. Ability to recompute the required quantity based on Assembly Over Completions/Scrap 50
7.3.1.3. Ability to update move transaction dates 50
7.3.1.4. View Sales Order demand information for Completed Work orders 50
7.3.1.5. Group Work Orders for Multiple Sales Order Lines in Auto Create Final Assembly Program 50
7.3.2. Release 12.2.10 51
7.3.2.1. Reserve Component Items of a Discrete Job 51
7.3.2.2. Allow Component Pick Release with Reservable Supply Subinventory 51
7.3.2.3. Trigger Business Events for WIP Move and WIP Completion Transactions 51
7.3.2.4. Display supply details for lower level ATO items in Supply to Order Workbench 51
7.3.3. Release 12.2.11 51
7.3.3.1. Prevent closing discrete job when open requisitions or PO exists 51
7.3.3.2. Update WIP accounting class for existing work orders 51
7.3.3.3. Use OTL Timecard page to capture resource instance usage details 51
7.3.3.4. Reserve Component Items of a Discrete Job in WMS organizations 51
7.3.3.5. Configure Change Order Notifications using Custom hook 51
7.3.3.6. Flexibly Copy Cross References while creating the configured item 52
7.3.3.1. Flexibly consider List price defined at the Inventory Organization level or the PO Validation Org level for
the items 52
7.3.4. Release 12.2.12 52
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document vi
7.3.4.1. Transact Dual UOM Items in Material Transactions 52
7.3.4.2. Generate OSP Shipment Lines and Print Shipping Documents 52
7.3.4.3. Flexibility to Update Purchase Requisitions Created from CTO 52
7.3.4.4. Display Lower-Level Supply Details for Buy Type Items in Supply to Order Workbench 52
7.3.4.5. Support Match for Config Items in Inactive Organizations 53
7.3.5. Release 12.2.13 53
7.3.5.1. Associate Serial Numbers to Work Order using WIP Mass Load 53
7.3.5.2. Mass update of item reservations 53
7.3.5.3. Create Requisitions for PO Move Resources without initiating workflow 53
7.3.5.4. Allow material transactions with multiple lots for dual UOM items via MSCA 53
7.3.5.5. LPN assembly completions for dual UOM items in WMS organizations 53
7.3.5.6. Ability to AutoCreate Configuration Items for a specific operating unit 53
7.3.5.7. Allow AutoCreate Final Assembly (AFAS) to create work orders based on fixed number of work orders or
fixed work order quantity 53
7.3.5.8. Ability to create a single requisition per sales order 53
7.4. Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Command Center 54
7.4.1. Overview 54
7.4.2. Release 12.2.8+ 54
7.4.2.1. Work Order Status Dashboard 54
7.4.2.2. Production Quality Dashboard 54
7.4.2.3. Outside Processing Dashboard 54
7.4.3. Release 12.2.9+ 54
7.4.3.1. Identify component shortages and find substitute components in Work Order Status dashboard 55
7.4.3.2. Insight into Assembly Scrap and Rejection quantities by Reasons in Production Quality dashboard 55
7.4.3.3. Metrics to highlight outside processing operation delays in Outside Processing dashboard 55
7.4.4. Release 12.2.9++ 55
7.4.4.1. Descriptive flex field search for the work order and related entities 55
7.4.4.2. Display dashboards for single organization 55
7.4.4.3. Apply refinements using multiple data sets 55
7.4.4.4. Ability to save search criteria 55
7.4.4.5. Export data from Results table in csv format 55
7.4.4.6. Compare attributes of multiple records from results table 55
7.4.5. Release 12.2.10 56
7.4.5.1. Navigation to Quality Nonconformances dashboard from Production Quality dashboard 56
7.4.5.1. Display First Pass Yield Metric in Production Quality dashboard 56
7.4.5.2. View attributes of result table by attribute groups in all dashboards 56
7.4.6. Release 12.2.10+ 56
7.4.6.1. Assembly Completions Dashboard 56
7.4.6.2. Genealogy & Trace Dashboard 56
7.4.6.3. Display Timestamp for the date attributes in all dashboards 56
7.4.6.1. Refine Delay Durations in Work Order Status dashboard 56
7.4.6.1. Navigate to Item dashboard from Work Order Status dashboard 57
7.4.6.2. Display Assembly In Progress Quantity of OSP operations in Outside Processing dashboard 57
7.4.7. Release 12.2.11 57
7.4.7.1. Display Scrap and Reject Serial Units in Genealogy & Trace dashboard 57
7.4.7.2. Display Organization or Operating Unit information in the entity node in Genealogy & Trace dashboard
57
7.4.7.3. Display Indicator Icons in the Entity node of Genealogy & Trace dashboard 57
7.4.7.4. Find Similar nodes based on common attributes in Genealogy & Trace dashboard 57
7.4.7.1. Multiselect nodes of same type and compare attributes 58
7.4.7.1. Export Network content as screenshot or csv format 58
7.4.7.2. Display At Receipt Assembly Serial Units of non-serialized work orders in Production Quality dashboard
58
7.4.7.1. Navigation from other dashboards to Genealogy & Trace dashboard 58
7.4.8. Release 12.2.11+ 58
7.4.8.1. Quick update pop-up action in Work Order Status dashboard 58
7.4.8.2. New Timeline Viewer component in Work Order Status dashboard 58
7.4.8.3. View Project and Task details in Work Order Status dashboard 58
7.4.8.4. View work orders having corresponding sales orders overdue in Work Order Status dashboard 59
7.4.8.5. View pending inspection quantities of OSP Operations in Outside Processing dashboard 59
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document vii
7.4.8.6. Additional action links in Genealogy & Trace dashboard 59
7.4.8.7. View Outsourced Manufacturing material genealogy in Genealogy & Trace dashboard 59
7.4.8.8. Color pinning of bar charts in Work Order Status, Production Quality and Outside Processing dashboards
59
7.4.9. Release 12.2.12+ 60
7.4.9.1. Work Order Execution Track and Trace in Work Order Status dashboard 60
7.4.9.2. Granular Delay metrics in Work Order Status dashboard 60
7.4.9.3. Organization and Date Range parameters in Data Load programs 60
7.4.9.4. Results table column values color badging and conditional formatting 60
7.4.9.5. Network and Timeline Viewer node display enhancements 60
7.4.10. Release 12.2.13 60
7.4.10.1. Work Order Delays Dataset Optimization 61
7.4.10.2. Enable Dataset parameter as a LOV field in data load programs 61
7.4.10.3. Limit Component node display in Work Order Execution Track & Trace network diagram 61
7.5. Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Information Discovery 61
7.5.1. Overview 61
7.5.3. V5 63
7.5.3.1. Discrete Work Orders 63
7.5.3.2. Project Manufacturing 63
7.5.4. V6 64
7.5.4.1. Work Order-less Transaction Visibility 64
7.6. Oracle Mobile Discrete Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite 64
7.6.2. Overview 65
7.6.3.2. Accessibility Improvements 66
7.6.3.3. Client Time Zone Support in Work Order Summary Tiles page 66
7.6.3.4. Landscape Display Support Improvements 66
7.6.4.1. Android Support 67
7.6.5.1. Support for read only access: 67
7.6.5.2. Reschedule Work Orders 67
7.6.5.3. Additional MES details 67
7.6.5.4. Truncate prefix and suffix characters during barcode scanning. 67
7.6.5.6. Translation Support. 67
7.6.6.1. Support attachments for work orders, operations and MES exceptions 68
7.6.6.2. Search Work Orders by Sales Order and Assembly Description 68
7.6.6.3. Filter work orders based on Job Class and Job Type 68
7.6.12.1. Uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF) 2.6.3 69
7.7. Oracle Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Discrete Manufacturing 69
7.7.1. Overview 69
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document viii
7.7.2. Release 12.1.1 70
7.7.2.1. Serialized Manufacturing 70
7.7.2.2. Shop Floor Device and Test Equipment Integration 70
7.7.2.3. Electronic Records and Signatures (ERES) 70
7.7.2.4. Improved Supervisor Dashboard 70
7.7.2.5. Printing Shop Floor Documentation 70
7.7.2.6. Usability Enhancements 71
7.7.2.7. Labor Skill Validation 71
7.7.3. Release 12.1.2 71
7.7.3.1. Ability to Perform Manufacturing Execution without any Dependency on the ERP System 71
7.7.3.2. Support for Detailed Routing Step in MES 72
7.7.3.3. Ability to Interface with Oracle E-Business Suite Releases Prior to Release 12 72
7.7.3.4. Web Services for Work in Process (WIP) 72
7.7.3.5. Simplified UIs for Users 72
7.7.4. Release 12.2 - Oracle Electronic Kanban 72
7.7.4.1. Configurable and User-Friendly Graphical User Interface 73
7.7.4.2. Enhanced Planning Capabilities 73
7.7.4.3. Logical Kanban Support 74
7.7.4.4. Extensive Search Capabilities 74
7.7.4.5. Configurable Supply Statuses for Kanban Cards 74
7.7.4.6. Enhanced Supplier Kanbans 74
7.7.4.7. Replenishment Order Consolidation 75
7.7.4.8. Temporary Kanban Cards 75
7.7.4.9. Notifications and Alerts 75
7.7.4.10. Configurable Analytics Dashboard 75
7.7.4.11. Configurable Production Kanban Job Status 75
7.7.4.12. Configurable “Full” Status Tolerance 76
7.7.4.13. Import and Export Capabilities 76
7.7.4.14. Access and Security 76
7.7.4.15. Integration with iSupplier portal 76
7.7.4.16. Customizable Using the Provided 76
7.7.4.17. Terminology 76
7.7.5. Release 12.2.2 77
7.7.5.1. Enhanced Serialized Manufacturing 77
7.7.5.2. MES Operator Workstation Enhancements 77
7.7.5.3. MES UI Configurability Enhancements 77
7.7.5.4. MES Custom Extension User Exits / Hooks 77
7.7.6. Release 12.2.4 78
7.7.6.1. Mass Return Components of Serialized Assembly (Dekitting) 78
7.7.6.2. 1.3Serialization APIs 78
7.7.7. Release 12.2.5 78
7.7.7.1. User Friendly Page to Clock In & Out 78
7.7.7.2. Resource Level Clock In/Out 78
7.7.7.3. Tablet Optimized Supervisor Screens: Exceptions & Work Orders 78
7.7.7.4. Component Availability Management 78
7.7.8. Release 12.2.6 79
7.7.8.1. Auto Associate Serial Numbers 79
7.7.8.2. Assembly Serial Number Clock in/out 79
7.7.9. Release 12.2.7 79
7.7.9.1. Express Complete for Job Operations 79
7.7.9.2. Improved User Interface to Review and Approve Operator Times 79
7.7.9.3. Improved Work Order Search and Exception Search 79
7.7.9.4. Support to Update Descriptive Flex Fields in Work Order Details Page 79
7.7.9.5. Provision to Assign Shop Floor Status 79
7.7.9.6. Support to Multiple Clock Out of Job Operations 80
7.7.9.7. Provision to Auto Associate Serial Number 80
7.7.10. Release 12.2.8 80
7.7.10.1. Ability to enable eKanban at Organization Level 80
7.7.10.2. Ability to receive Kanban in common sub inventory 80
7.7.10.3. View/Update DFF attributes for Pull Sequences and Kanban Cards 80
7.7.10.4. Internal Organization centric view for Kanban cards 80
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document ix
7.7.10.5. Publish Kanban APIs and Interfaces 80
7.7.10.6. Show Blanket Purchase release for Supplier Kanban 80
7.7.10.7. Specifying Component revision during backflush transactions 80
7.7.10.8. Validate material issue of push components at WIP completion 80
7.7.10.9. View bar code and reported time of a work order 80
7.7.11. Release 12.2.9 81
7.7.11.1. View Onhand Quantity across subinventories during Material Issue Transactions 81
7.7.11.2. Ability to recompute the required quantity based on Assembly Over Completions/Scrap 81
7.7.11.3. Restrict Move Transactions based on the Department Access 81
7.7.11.4. View Sales Order demand information for Completed Work orders 81
7.7.12. Release 12.2.11 81
7.7.12.1. Fully distribute exploded demand of the components to the pull sequences during eKanban Planning run
81
7.7.12.2. View history of clock-in / clock-out at employee / department level 81
7.7.12.3. View Work Order details and re-schedule Work Orders 81
7.7.13. Release 12.2.12 81
7.7.13.1. View Shift In and Shift Out Details of Operators 81
7.7.13.2. Assign Resource Instances for Discrete Jobs 81
7.7.13.3. eKanban - Configure Beginning Onhand in the Horizontal Plan 82
7.7.14. Release 12.2.13 82
7.7.14.1. Ability to reserve component items for work orders 82
7.7.14.2. Navigate to operation details page from dispatch list 82
7.7.14.3. Update Operation Progress % for job operation 82
7.7.14.4. Print Job Traveler for multiple jobs 82
7.8. Oracle Electronic Kanban 83
7.8.1. Overview 83
7.8.2. Release 12.2 83
7.8.2.1. Configurable and User-Friendly Graphical User Interface 83
7.8.2.2. Enhanced Planning Capabilities 83
7.8.2.3. Logical Kanban Support 84
7.8.2.4. Extensive Search Capabilities 84
7.8.2.5. Configurable Supply Statuses for Kanban Cards 85
7.8.2.6. Enhanced Supplier Kanbans 85
7.8.2.7. Replenishment Order Consolidation 85
7.8.2.8. Temporary Kanban Cards 85
7.8.2.9. Notifications and Alerts 85
7.8.2.10. Configurable Analytics Dashboard 85
7.8.2.11. Configurable Production Kanban Job Status 86
7.8.2.12. Configurable “Full” Status Tolerance 86
7.8.2.13. Import and Export Capabilities 86
7.8.2.14. Access and Security 86
7.8.2.15. Integration with iSupplier portal 86
7.8.2.16. Customizable Using the Provided 86
7.8.3. Release 12.2.8 87
7.8.3.1. Ability to enable eKanban at Organization Level 87
7.8.3.2. Ability to receive Kanban in common sub inventory 87
7.8.3.3. View/Update DFF attributes for Pull Sequences and Kanban Cards 87
7.8.3.4. Internal Organization centric view for Kanban cards 87
7.8.3.5. Publish Kanban APIs and Interfaces 87
7.8.3.6. Show Blanket Purchase release for Supplier Kanban 87
7.8.4. Release 12.2.11 87
7.8.4.1. Fully distribute exploded demand of the components to the pull sequences during eKanban Planning run
87
7.8.5. Release 12.2.12 88
7.8.5.1. eKanban - Configure Beginning Onhand in the Horizontal Plan 88
7.8.6. Release 12.2.13 88
7.8.6.1. Oracle Electronic Kanban in new OA pages and ECC dashboard 88
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document x
7.9. Oracle Shop Floor Management (OSFM) 89
7.9.1. Release 12.1.1 89
7.9.1.1. Refresh BOM/Routing of Lot Based Jobs 89
7.9.1.2. Lot Creation Using Substitute Components 89
7.9.1.3. Lot Uniqueness/Reuse of Lot Name 89
7.9.1.4. Network Routing – Lead Time Calculation 89
7.9.1.5. Lot Based Job Interface Enhancements 90
7.10. Oracle Supply Chain Globalization 90
7.10.1. Release 12.1.1 90
7.10.1.1. Buy/Sell Subcontracting 90
7.10.3. Release 12.2.11 91
7.10.3.1. BREXIT and modified Intrastat Reporting 91
7.10.3.2. Exclude Expense and Service Items from Movement Statistics Report 91
7.10.3.3. API to reset Movement Statistics Records 92
7.10.4. Release 12.2.12 92
7.10.4.1. IR/ISO Returns Included in Movement Statistics 92
7.10.5. Release 12.2.13 92
7.10.5.1. Concurrent program wrapper for Movement Statistics Reset API 92
7.11. Oracle Project Manufacturing 92
7.11.1. Release 12.2.11 92
7.11.1.1. Enable Fast Transfer of Project Materials 92
7.11.2. Release 12.2.13 92
7.11.2.1. Remove Payback Demand on Inactive Projects 92
7.12. Oracle Project Manufacturing Command Center 92
7.12.1. Overview 92
7.12.2. Release 12.2.10+ 93
7.12.2.1. Overview Dashboard 93
7.12.2.2. Projects Dashboard 93
7.12.2.3. Work Orders Dashboard 93
7.12.2.4. Procurement Dashboard 93
7.12.2.5. Inventory Dashboard 93
7.12.2.6. Sales Order Dashboard 94
7.12.3. Release 12.2.11 94
7.12.3.1. Schedule and Overdue exceptions in Work Order, Sales Orders and Procurement dashboards 94
7.12.4. Release 12.2.11+ 94
7.12.4.1. Track & Trace Dashboard 94
7.12.4.2. Navigate to Track & Trace dashboard from other project manufacturing dashboards 94
7.12.4.3. Navigate to discrete manufacturing Work Order Status dashboard from Work Orders dashboard 95
7.12.4.4. Navigate to discrete manufacturing Work Order Status dashboard from Overview dashboard 95
7.12.5. Release 12.2.12 95
7.12.5.1. Display Timeline View in Dashboards 95
7.12.5.2. View Timeline for Entity Nodes in Genealogy & Trace Dashboard 95
7.12.6. Release 12.2.12+ 95
7.12.6.1. Cost Activities dashboard 95
7.12.6.2. Project Contracts dashboard 95
7.12.6.3. Navigate to the Receiving Dashboard from the Procurement dashboard 95
7.12.6.4. Navigate to the Reservation Workbench from the Work Orders and Sales Orders dashboards 96
7.12.6.5. Navigate to the Shipping Operations HTML page from the Sales Order or Project Contracts dashboards
96
7.12.7. Release 12.2.13 96
7.12.7.1. Color pinnig of chart in Cost Activities dashboard 96
7.12.7.2. Visibility of work order dates in Work Order dashboard 96
7.13. Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite 96
7.13.2. Overview 97
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xi
7.13.5.2. Translation Support 98
8. New and Changed Features in Process Manufacturing 99
8.1. Oracle Inventory (Inventory Convergence) 99
8.1.1. Overview 99
8.1.2. Features 99
8.1.2.1. Dual unit of measure control for any item 99
8.1.2.2. Advanced lot control 99
8.1.2.3. Material status 100
8.1.2.4. Enhanced inventory allocation rules 100
8.1.2.5. Migrating to Oracle Inventory 101
8.1.2.6. Viewing historical data 101
8.1.3. Release 12.2 102
8.1.3.1. Advanced Catch-Weight 102
8.1.5. Third Party Integration Points 102
8.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Product Development 102
8.2.1. Overview 102
8.2.2. Features 103
8.2.2.1. Inventory Convergence Impact on Product Development Workbench 103
8.2.2.2. Inventory Convergence Impact on Formula Management 103
8.2.2.3. Inventory Convergence Impact on Routings 103
8.2.2.4. Inventory Convergence Impact on Operations 103
8.2.2.5. Inventory Convergence Impact on Recipe Management 103
8.2.2.6. Inventory Convergence Impact on Technical Data 104
8.2.2.7. Inventory Convergence Impact on Simulator 104
8.2.2.8. Inventory Convergence Impact on Formula Analysis, Formula Inquiry, Indented BOM 105
8.2.2.9. Inventory Convergence Impact on Mass Search and Replace 106
8.2.2.10. Inventory Convergence Impact on Product Development Workflow and ERES 106
8.2.2.11. Item Substitution lists associated with the Item Master 106
8.2.2.12. Effective Formulas 106
8.2.2.13. One to One Substitutions 107
8.2.2.14. Using Substitute Items with Planning 107
8.2.2.15. Least Cost Formulation: Product Specifications 107
8.2.2.16. Least Cost Formulation: Generate Formulas based on Least Cost 107
8.2.2.17. Least Cost Formulation: Create Batches Based on Cost 107
8.2.2.18. Least Cost Formulation: Specify which Costs to Use 108
8.2.2.19. Least Cost Formulation: Generate Batches without a Predefined Formula 108
8.2.2.20. Least Cost Formulation: Choose Materials based on Categories or Substitute Items 108
8.2.2.21. Least Cost Formulation: Select Formula/Recipe based on Least Cost 108
8.2.3. Release 12.0.6 (RUP6) 108
8.2.3.1. Fixed Process Loss 108
8.2.3.2. DFF for Step Material Associations 108
8.2.4. Release 12.2.6 109
8.2.4.1. Planned Yield 109
8.2.5. Release 12.2.10 109
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xii
8.2.5.1. Version Control Attributes for revising entities in Product Development 109
8.3. Oracle Regulatory Management 109
8.3.1. Overview 109
8.3.2. Features 109
8.3.2.1. Regulatory Item Migration 109
8.3.2.2. Regulatory Item Properties Migration 110
8.3.2.3. Regulatory Formula Migration 110
8.3.2.4. Track the distribution of Safety Documents – Dispatch History 110
8.3.2.5. OPM Data available for export – Item Property Data 110
8.3.2.6. Document Rebuild Required Workflow 110
8.3.2.7. Regulatory Document Printing 111
8.3.2.8. Sales Order Document Required API 111
8.3.2.9. Shipping Attachment API 111
8.3.2.10. Print Regulatory Shipping Documents API 111
8.3.2.11. Regulatory Document Portal 111
8.3.2.12. Territory Profiles form 111
8.3.2.13. 3rd Party Data Change Workflow 111
8.3.3. Release 12.0.6 (RUP6) 111
8.3.3.1. OPM Regulatory Management: European Regulatory Compliance 111
8.3.4. Release 12.1.1 112
8.3.4.1. Regulatory Partner Certification 112
8.4. Oracle Process Manufacturing Process Execution 112
8.4.1. Overview 112
8.4.2. Features 113
8.4.2.1. Impact of Inventory Convergence on Process Execution 113
8.4.2.2. Screen Redesign 115
8.4.2.3. Rescheduling of Scaled Batch 115
8.4.3. Release 12.1.1 115
8.4.3.1. Multi-Batch / Support for Mass Transactions 115
8.4.3.2. Make-To-Order 116
8.4.4. R12.2.5 116
8.4.4.1. Oracle Process Manufacturing Outside Processing (OSP) (also for 12.2.4+) 116
8.4.4.2. Multiple Outside Processing Steps per Batch 117
8.4.4.3. Ability to open PO from Batch Detail Window from OSP 117
8.4.4.4. Oracle Process Manufacturing Batch Hold 117
8.4.5. Release 12.2.6 117
8.4.5.1. Yield Measurement 117
8.4.6. Release 12.2.7 118
8.4.6.1. Support for Resource Instance Update 118
8.4.7. Release 12.2.9 118
8.4.7.1. Support for Serialization 118
8.4.8. Release 12.2.10 118
8.4.8.1. MSCA transactions for Serial Controlled Items 118
8.4.8.2. Track Consumed Ingredient Lot/Serials for Product Lot/Serials in a Batch 119
8.4.8.3. Create Batches based on Customer Specific Recipes 119
8.4.9. Release 12.2.11 119
8.4.9.1. Automatic Mapping of Ingredient Lot/Serials to Product Lot/Serials 119
8.4.9.1. Ingredient Substitution based on Availability 119
8.4.9.1. Create Rework Batches 119
8.4.10. Release 12.2.12 119
8.4.10.1. Automatic Step Release upon Batch Release 119
8.4.10.2. Automatic Update of Reservations and Material Quantities upon Scaling 119
8.4.10.3. Cancel Pending Steps in a Pending or WIP Batch 120
8.4.10.4. Generate OSP Shipment Lines and Print Shipping Documents 120
8.4.11. Release 12.2.13 120
8.4.11.1. Ability to map an ingredient lot / serial to product lot / serial using API 120
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xiii
8.5. Oracle Process Manufacturing Command Center 121
8.5.1. Overview 121
8.5.2. Release 12.2.8+ 121
8.5.2.1. Batch Status Dashboard 121
8.5.2.2. Production Quality Dashboard 121
8.5.3. Release 12.2.9+ 121
8.5.3.1. Enhancements to Batch Status and Production Quality Metrics 121
8.5.3.2. Enhancements to Refinements of Batch Status and Production Quality Dashboards 121
8.5.3.3. Enhancements to Results Table 122
8.5.4. Release 12.2.9++ 122
8.5.4.1. Descriptive flex field search for the batch and related entities 122
8.5.4.2. Support for saved search 122
8.5.4.3. Export the records in Results table to csv format 122
8.5.4.4. Compare the records in Results table 122
8.5.5. Release 12.2.10 122
8.5.5.1. Outside Processing Dashboard 122
8.5.6. Release 12.2.10+ 122
8.5.6.1. Display Timestamp for the date attributes in all dashboards 122
8.5.6.2. Insight into Batch planned consumption of expiring lots 123
8.5.6.3. Navigate to Reservations forms/OA page from the expiring lots table of Batch Status dashboard 123
8.5.6.4. Display Open Quantity to Receive for OSP operations in Outside Processing dashboard 123
8.5.7. Release 12.2.11 123
8.5.7.1. Color Pinning for Batch Status and Sample Disposition Attributes in Graphs 123
8.5.7.2. Navigation to the Items dashboard and Sample Inspection/Sample Analysis Dashboards 123
8.5.8. Release 12.2.11+ 123
8.5.8.1. Genealogy & Trace Dashboard 123
8.5.8.2. Batch hold pop-up action in Batch Status dashboard 124
8.5.8.3. Timeline Viewer component in Batch Status dashboard 124
8.5.8.4. Navigate from Batch Status dashboard to Genealogy & Trace dashboard 124
8.5.9. Release 12.2.12+ 124
8.5.9.1. Reorganization of metrics in Batch Status dashboard 124
8.5.9.2. Organization and Date Range parameters in the Data Load programs 124
8.5.9.3. Quick Batch actions in Batch Status dashboard 124
8.5.9.4. Display additional attribute group in result table for batches on hold 125
8.5.9.5. Results table column values color badging 125
8.5.10. Release 12.2.13 125
8.5.10.1. Reorganization of metrics in Batch Status dashboard 125
8.6. Oracle Process Manufacturing Information Discovery 125
8.6.1. Overview 125
8.6.2.1. Oracle Cost Management Information Discovery 126
8.6.3. V5 128
8.6.3.1. Oracle Process Manufacturing Laboratory Management Visibility 128
8.6.4. V7 128
8.6.4.1. Batch Information Discovery Enhancements 128
8.6.4.2. Quality Information Discovery Enhancements 128
8.6.5. V8 129
8.6.5.1. Advanced Search and Wildcard Search Capabilities 129
8.6.5.2. Navigation from Batch Information Discovery to Item and Quality Information Discovery Pages 129
8.7. Oracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite 129
8.7.2. Overview 130
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xiv
8.7.5.2. Translation Support. 131
8.7.11.1. Uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF) 2.6.3 132
8.8. Oracle Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Process Manufacturing 132
8.8.1. Features 132
8.8.1.1. Batch Journal 132
8.8.1.2. Dispensing and Preweigh 133
8.8.1.3. Label Management 133
8.8.1.4. Deviation Management 133
8.8.1.5. Simplified Production Reporting 134
8.8.1.6. Improved Processing Instruction and SOP Visibility 134
8.8.1.7. Operator Certification 134
8.8.1.8. Simplified Electronic Signatures / Initialing 135
8.8.2. Overview 135
8.8.4. Release 12.0.2 (RUP2) 135
8.8.4.1. Touch Screen User Interface 135
8.8.4.2. Dispensing Area 135
8.8.4.3. Dispense Planning 136
8.8.4.4. Operator Certification 136
8.8.4.5. Least Cost Formulation Batches 136
8.8.5. Release 12.2.8 136
8.8.5.1. Quality Inspection using Touch Screen User Interface 136
8.8.5.2. Formula Security in MES Dispensing 136
8.8.5.3. Support Include Tare in Dispensing Touch Screen Preferences 136
8.8.5.4. Show Lot Attributes in Dispensing Touch Screen 136
8.8.5.5. Support for Label Printing 136
8.8.6. Release 12.2.9 136
8.8.6.1. Support for Batch Specific Process Instructions 136
8.8.7. Release 12.2.10 137
8.8.7.1. Support for capturing of multiple readings for a process parameter 137
8.8.7.2. Support for Serial Controlled/Serial-Tagged Item transactions 137
8.8.8. Release 12.2.11 137
8.8.8.1. Support for Adhoc Label Printing 137
8.8.8.1. E-Signatures for execution of Optional and Mandatory-Able-To-Proceed type of process instructions137
8.8.8.1. Support for Additional Attributes and Attachments for Process Instructions 137
8.8.8.1. Material Loss during Dispensing Process 137
8.8.9. Release 12.2.12 137
8.8.9.1. Support for Clearance Instructions 137
8.8.9.1. Automatic Material Transaction upon Dispensing 138
8.8.9.1. Flexible Device Integration Mode for Dispensing Scales 138
8.8.10. Release 12.2.13 138
8.8.10.1. Log nonconformances from MES workbench and touchscreen interface 138
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xv
8.9. Process Manufacturing Planning 138
8.9.1. Overview 138
8.9.2. Features 138
8.9.2.1. Integration of Production Batches 138
8.9.2.2. Integration of Recipes 139
8.9.2.3. Integration of Inventory 139
8.9.2.4. Item Cost 139
8.9.2.5. Shop Calendar 139
8.9.2.6. Forecast 139
8.9.2.7. Item Substitution Effectivity Date Support 139
8.9.2.8. Firming Feedback from ASCP to OPM 139
8.9.3. Release 12.1.1 140
8.9.3.1. Resource Batching 140
8.10. OPM System Administration – Inventory Convergence Migration 140
8.10.1. Overview 140
8.10.2. Features 141
8.10.2.1. Convergence Migration 141
8.10.2.2. OPM System Administration 142
8.10.3. Release 12.2.11 143
8.10.3.1. Purge and Archive of Batch Transactional data 143
8.10.4. Release 12.2.13 143
8.10.4.1. Purge and Archive of Quality transactions 143
8.11. Oracle Process Manufacturing Logistics 143
8.11.2.1. Converged Inventory Modifications to Order Management 144
8.11.2.2. Move Orders enhanced to display Available Inventory 145
8.11.2.3. Automatic creation of a batch for a sales order line 145
8.12. Oracle Purchasing Integration 145
8.12.2.1. Converged Inventory Modifications to Purchasing 146
8.12.2.2. Enhanced Receiving Inspection 146
8.13. Oracle E-Records 147
8.13.2.1. Enable Electronic Recordkeeping for SSWA Applications 147
8.13.2.2. Electronic Recordkeeping for Mobile Transaction Framework 147
9. New and Changed Features in Manufacturing Operations Center 148
9.1. Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center – 148
9.1.1. Overview 148
9.1.2. Release 12.1.1 148
9.1.2.1. Open, Flexible Data Model 148
9.1.2.2. Customer Specific Process Parameter Monitoring Support 148
9.1.2.3. ERP Data Adaptor 149
9.1.2.4. Hierarchical Dimensions 149
9.1.2.5. Data Integration with Other Transactional Systems 149
9.1.2.6. Device Connectivity 149
9.1.2.7. Device Data Management and Contextualization 149
9.1.2.8. Time Zone Conversion 149
9.1.2.9. Error Handling 150
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xvi
9.1.2.10. Role-based Dashboards 150
9.1.2.11. Manufacturing Operations Center Catalog - KPIs and Metrics 151
9.1.3. Release 12.1.2 152
9.1.3.1. Certification with Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12.0.6 152
9.1.3.2. Event Management Framework 152
9.1.3.3. EBS Adapter for Process Manufacturing 153
9.1.3.4. EBS Adapter Enhancement for Discrete Manufacturing 153
9.1.3.5. Production Quality Monitoring 153
9.1.3.6. Item Category Enhancement 153
9.1.3.7. Production Performance Reporting 154
9.1.4. Release 12.2.1 154
9.1.4.1. ODI based Data Integration Platform 154
9.1.4.2. Recalculation 154
9.1.4.3. Error Reprocessing 155
9.1.4.4. Asset Performance Dashboard 155
9.1.4.5. Production Supervisor Dashboard 155
9.1.4.6. Support for Oracle Business Intelligence Mobile 155
9.1.5. Release 12.2.3 156
9.1.5.1. Enhanced Inbound Integration with Oracle EBS 156
9.1.5.2. Outbound Integration with Oracle EBS-Discrete Manufacturing 156
9.1.5.3. Outbound Integration with Oracle EBS-Process Manufacturing 156
9.1.6. Release 12.2.4 157
9.1.6.1. Equipment Summary Table for Extensible Attributes 157
9.1.6.2. Mathematical functions for Extensible Attributes 157
9.1.7. Release 12.2.5 157
9.1.7.1. Operations based Equipment Standard Rate 157
9.1.7.2. Reason Codes for Run Time 157
9.1.7.3. Process Engineer Dashboard 157
9.1.7.4. Context Update for Tag Entries 157
9.1.8. Release 12.2.6 158
9.1.8.1. Archiving and Purging 158
9.1.9. Release 12.2.7 158
9.1.9.1. Support for Mass Upload of Attribute Summary Function 158
9.1.9.2. ODI Scenario to Generate Shifts 158
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document xvii
1. Disclaimer
This Release Content Document (RCD) describes product features that are proposed for
the specified release of the Oracle E-Business Suite. This document describes new or
changed functionality only. Existing functionality from prior releases is not described. It
is intended solely to help you assess the business benefits of upgrading to the specified
release of the Oracle E-Business Suite.
This document in any form, software, or printed matter, contains proprietary information
that is the exclusive property of Oracle. Your access to and use of this confidential
material is subject to the terms and conditions of your Oracle Software License and
Service Agreement, which has been executed and with which you agree to comply. This
document and information contained herein may not be disclosed, copied, reproduced, or
distributed to anyone outside Oracle without prior written consent of Oracle. This
document is not part of your license agreement nor can it be incorporated into any
contractual agreement with Oracle or its subsidiaries or affiliates.
This document is for informational purposes only and is intended solely to assist you in
planning for the implementation and upgrade of the product features described. It is not a
commitment to deliver any material, code, or functionality, and should not be relied upon
in making purchasing decisions. The development, release, and timing of any features or
functionality described in this document remains at the sole discretion of Oracle.
Due to the nature of the product architecture, it may not be possible to safely include all
features described in this document without risking significant destabilization of the code.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Purpose of Document 1
2. Introduction
2.1. Purpose of Document

This Release Content Document (RCD) communicates information about new or changed
functionality introduced in Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2, and in
subsequent Release Update Packs (RUPs) and off-cycle patches. For your convenience,
it also includes new or changed functionality introduced in the RUPs for Release 12,
including 12.0.2 through 12.0.7.
The features and enhancements described in this document are grouped by product, and
then by the release in which they first became available, for example, “Release 12.1.1”.
Features released in an off-cycle patch have a special designation – for example, a feature
released after 12.1.1, but before 12.1.2, is designated as “Release 12.1.1+”.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Purpose of Document 2
3. New and Changed Features in Oracle In-Memory Cost
Management
3.1. Oracle In-Memory Cost Management for Discrete Industries and Oracle In-
Memory Cost Management for Process Industries - New Products – 12.1.3 and
12.2
Oracle In-Memory Cost Management for Discrete Industries and Oracle In-Memory Cost
Management for Process Industries are new set of products that are available with Oracle
E-Business Suite 12.1.3 and 12.2.
3.1.1. Overview
Oracle In-Memory Cost Management is a new set of application tools that provides a
bottoms-up approach to maximizing profit margins by enabling near real-time insight into
all aspects of cost management. Oracle In-Memory Cost Management’s extreme
performance is possible because of the game-changing technical innovations within
Oracle’s In-Memory technologies, including Oracle 12C Database In-Memory option,
pinning tables to heap memory, columnar compression, smart scans, and flash cache.
Cost accountants, managers, and line of business owners in finance, operations,

manufacturing, and procurement can now use Oracle In-Memory Cost Management to
plan product costs, quickly perform what-if simulations on complex cost data and instantly
visualize the impact of changes to their business. Specifically optimized for Oracle’s In-
Memory technologies, Oracle In-Memory Cost Management provides a suite of solutions
to perform complex cost analyses, identify optimal profit margins, and perform cost
planning and forecasting so that companies can make decisions in time to capture the
highest possible profits, safeguard current margins and identify optimal future margins,
streamline financial overview across the supply chain, and increase financial close
efficiency.
The products consist of following components:
3.1.2. Cost Impact Simulator (CIS)

Simulations show the impact of product cost variations from bills of materials, formulae,
recipes, routings, resources, and overheads. The Cost Impact Simulator is used for
analyzing the impact on Cost of Goods Sold and gross profit margins originating from
costs in on-hand quantity, inventory, and work in process. You have the ability to perform
comprehensive what-if analysis on complex multi level bills of materials, formulae,
recipes and routings in near real-time. This tool replaces the manual labor-intensive
process of translating the impact of cost changes into the price list. You can investigate the
impact of a cost change by simply identifying the cost components and providing the new
costs. CIS uses this input and creates real-time simulation for cost impact on product
margins to analyze and plan target costs, and predict margins based target cost scenarios.
3.1.3. Gross Profit Analyzer (GPA)
The Gross Profit Analyzer uses Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE)
technology to provide multi-dimensional slide-and-dice capability to analyze margins and
profits. There are two methods for invoking the GPA. You can navigate from CIS to
analyze the downstream impacts of changes to costs (components, ingredients, resources,
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content DocumentOracle In-Memory Cost Management for Discrete Industries and Oracle In-Memory
Cost Management for Process Industries - New Products – 12.1.3 and 12.2 3
and overheads), on Cost of Goods Sold, margins and gross profits (actual, planned, and
forecasted). You can also navigate directly to GPA from the Navigator to analyze actual
versus /simulated COGS and margins. GPA has interface to import demand forecast data
and allows users to extend the impact of cost changes to future margins and gross profits.
3.1.4. Cost Comparison Tool

The In-Memory Cost Management Cost Comparison tool provides the ability to
compare detailed indented assembly and recipe costs across different periods, cost types
plants and organizations. Costs are presented in a side-by-side view. Cost Comparison
enables you to view costed bills and recipes and associated elements, investigate
differences, and take actions on costs impacting profitability.
3.1.5. Cost Planning for Discrete Industries
3.1.5.1. Overview
Cost Planning is a new set of capabilities enhancing the existing product, In-Memory Cost
Management for Discrete Industries. Cost Planning enables organizations to derive
accurate Cost of Goods Manufactured (COGM) in complex global manufacturing
environments. Major features include
• Real-time allocation tool to obtain accurate COGM from GL, Procurement,
Logistics, Maintenance and other supply chain functions
• What–if simulations for planning costs across multiple manufacturing locations,
processes, contract manufacturers
• Create and compare alternate COGM models based on diverse business scenario
• Forecast component and finished goods cost based on historical costs, external
parameters
• Cost-volume-profit analysis to assist global manufacturers with Break-Even point
analysis for manufacturing and sourcing decisions, strategic pricing, and sales
volume
• Real-time multi-dimensional analysis of company-wide cost patterns using
OBIEE dashboards
Four major components of Cost Planning are

1. Flexible Metadata Definition
2. Cost Plan
3. Smart-view Excel reports
4. OBIEE Profitability Dashboard
3.1.5.2. Flexible Metadata Definition

The metadata definition for cost planning has three core business objects
Allocation Scope - Allocation scope provides the ability to identify the desired range of
items, overheads, or resources. In addition to the seeded classification, Oracle Cost
Planning allows user-defined logic to determine allocation scope. This feature offers
greater flexibility in addressing customer specific scope definition.
Allocation Pool - Provides the capability to group costs stored in your financial systems.
The product supports EBS GL out-of-the-box and also provides the ability to use other
financials systems.
Allocation Rule - Allocation rules enables users to define allocation methodology for
various cost elements. Each allocation rule is specific to a scope and pool, and the user is
allowed to choose from a comprehensive set of pre-seeded cost drivers and driver
methods. Cost planning further allows user-defined cost drivers to provide more detailed
allocation models.
3.1.5.3. Cost Plan

The user can model various supply chain scenarios in the Cost Plan execution UI to
evaluate alternative business strategies through unlimited supply chain simulations to
adapt to an ever-changing business environment.
Powered by Oracle 12C In-Memory Database option, different departments including

cost engineering, manufacturing, procurement, and value engineering teams can analyze
massive data sets. The feature provides the ability to leverage up-to-minute information
across financials, manufacturing, and supply chain at unparalleled speed.
3.1.5.4. Smart View Excel Reports
To improve business performance, planners need to assess plan cost information and
translate this information into actions. Cost Planning provides pre-seeded spreadsheets
based excel reports.
The embedded analytics in these reports enable business users to analyze quickly the
business impact of "What -If” options considered. Smart view based spreadsheets support
critical cost management processes where you can perform product cost comparison
analysis across Organizations, Products, Overheads, and Resources with granular
information about all costs and sub-elements.
Break-Even Point Analysis - Cost Planning allows fixed costs allocations; the product
provides the detailed break-even point and contribution margin analysis of products.
Calculating the break-even point can provide a simple, yet powerful quantitative tool for
managers.
3.1.5.5. OBIEE Profitability Dashboard

Cost Planning provides profitability dashboard with multi-dimensional product cost
data which is trusted, aggregated information for your decision makers.
Pre-built Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE) dashboards

provide insight into an organization’s profitability and impact of various proposed
supply chain scenarios.
Users can analyze historical and current information; compare cost plan scenarios in
a single dashboard to help you quickly move from insight to the decision.
4. New and Changed Features in Cost Management
4.1. Oracle Cost Management

4.1.1. Release 12.0.4 (RUP4)
4.1.1.1. Iterative Periodic Average Costing (IPAC) for Brazil

This enhancement supports a legal mandate for Brazilian customers. Under Brazilian
Law, the cost of inter-organization transactions must include the actual absorption cost of
the items that have been transacted. Periodic costing has been enhanced to calculate the
cost of these transactions, including all input costs. This was available in 11.5.10 as
PACP.
4.1.2. Release 12.1.1
4.1.2.1. Iterative Periodic Average Cost Processor

Oracle Cost Management Release 12.1.1 extends the capabilities found in the Periodic
Average Cost (PAC) method through the addition of a new Iterative Periodic Average
Cost Processor (IPAC). The new IPAC processor allows you to more accurately cost
recursive Inter-Org transfers between organizations that are in different PAC cost groups.
When two PAC cost groups perform inter-org shipments of an item to each other, the
periodic cost of the item in each source org can only be calculated at the end of the
accounting period. However when an item is transferred back and forth between a pair of
PAC cost groups for example, the cost of the period transfers in each org can only be
calculated by simultaneously deriving the cost in each organization while factoring in the
cost of the as yet uncosted transfer transactions.
The new IPAC process resolves such bilateral transfer cost dependencies by recursively
calculating the cost in each PAC cost group.
4.1.2.2. Global Accounting Engine Forward Port to Subledger Accounting

The Global Accounting Engine (AX) functionality has been forward ported to Subledger
Accounting (SLA) Release 12.1.1, as this functionality did not exist in base Release 12.
The implementation of the Permanent Inventory Accounting feature in Subledger
Accounting Release 12.1.1 is necessary to provide an upgrade path for European
customers using the corresponding Global Accounting Engine feature in Oracle 11i.
Release 12.1.1 provides Subledger Accounting (SLA) rules with the same functionality
that was available with the Global Accounting Engine (AX) rules in previous releases.
Oracle 11i customers using AX for specific European requirements on top of CST will be
able to upgrade to Release 12.1.1 using seeded Subledger Accounting (SLA) definitions
that replace the Permanent Inventory Rules provided by the Global Accounting Engine in
Release 11i.
• All the accounting events for which AX creates journal entries in Release 11i are
accounted for Release 12.
• The accounts derived in SLA through the Account Derivation Rules match the
ones derived in AX.
• The Journal Entry Descriptions created by SLA match the ones assigned by AX
Permanent Inventory Rules.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Cost Management 7
• All the sources used in conditions in AX are available in SLA, so that similar
journal entries can be created under the same conditions.
• The journal entries created by SLA are equivalent to the ones created by AX.
4.1.2.3. Support for Landed Cost Management

Landed Cost Management Release 12.1.1 is available and supported with Oracle Cost
Management. The Landed Cost is calculated in order to accurately measure the
corporation’s costs and profitability by the good/item, product line, lot, business unit,
organization, etc. They play a significant role in actual costing, evaluating on-hand
inventory, as well as setting sales prices and revenue forecasting.
Oracle Cost Management supports the ability to cost buy items with Estimated Landed
Cost and Actual Landed Cost, Inventory valuation with ELC and ALC towards achieving
more accurate cost than just PO price and accounting distributions for Estimated Landed
Cost and Actual Landed Cost.
4.1.3. Release 12.1.2
4.1.3.1. EMEA Joint Project - Inventory Master Book Report

As per Italian legal requirements all first party legal entity should submit the Inventory
Master Book Report to the internal and external auditors when required to show the
movements of all inventory transactions between inventory organizations and
subinventories with in the same legal entity including opening and closing balances of all
items.
The Inventory Master Book has been changed in order to meet Italian and Chinese legal
requirements. In Italy Inventory Master Book report is mandatory for all Italian legal
entities with an inventory entity (manufacturing facility, warehouse, etc). For all first
party legal entity all inventory movements within a date range should be displayed in the
Inventory Master Book report. The report will print Ledger for Chinese requirements and
now is a report running parameter. This report will display opening inventory of all items
along with transactions and closing inventory balances of all inventory items. The report
a) must be submitted by first party legal entity, Per Ledger, Date range (like it is in the
existing report version), Inventory Organization, and Subinventory Organization; b) will
break per Item, per Inventory Organization, per Subinventory Organization or per a mix
of them.
It is required that the Inventory Master Book prints for the first party legal entity all items
transactions movements occurred in the Inventory and Subinventory Organizations
within the specified date range. Thus the new report version will continue to be submitted
within a date range (like it is in the existing report version). In Italy, all statutory reports,
official documents and official letters must print the first party legal entity identification
information, the page numbering according to the Italian laws and Italian fiscal authority
specifications. The amounts in the statutory reports are shown in the functional currency.
4.1.3.2. SLA Post Down-time Upgrade as Concurrent Programs

The objective is to decrease the volume of data upgraded to R12 when there is no need for
it. For e.g., for PO and AP encumbrance reversal only open PO needs to have XLA
distribution links when prior account entries need to be reversed. With the current upgrade
strategy, the customer is mandated to upgrade all sub ledgers data for all ledgers, increasing
unnecessarily the volume in XLA Distribution links, leading to administration and
performance issues.
With this objective in mind SLA has a new concurrent program “Upgrade Historical Sub
ledger Transaction Accounting” which can be used to upgrade the old data to SLA for a
particular product and ledger. The scope of this document is to discuss on the Costing API
changes done to support the XLA concurrent program.
4.1.4. Release 12.1.3
4.1.4.1. Encumbrance Accounting for Purchase Orders with Shop Floor

Destination
Customers need to better control their expenses to avoid over-spending of their budgets.
For Public Sector, budget regulation is a statutory requirement.
The budgetary control is done during PO entry process.
For PO requisition approval: the fund booked is a commitment.
For PO Purchase Order approval: the fund booked as an obligation.
During the receiving of those purchased goods, the amount necessary for the acquisition
of those items will generate actual accounting entries. The fund previously booked will
be relieved when the actual accounting entries are created. This procedure is called
encumbrance reversal.
Cost Management is responsible for the actual accounting during the receiving process,
and relieves the fund previously booked by generating an encumbrance reversal
distribution representing the amount previously booked proportionate to the quantity
being received.
In EBS release 12.1.2, the implementation of encumbrance reversal for SCM is limited to
Inventory and Expense Receiving transactions. Now in release 12.1.3, this functionality
has been extended to Shop Floor destination Purchase Orders, where the distributions
will be created under WIP transactions.
Note for EAM Work-Order and OSP transactions: This approach will be implemented for
Shop Floor Destination Purchase Orders and customers are able to use encumbrance
accounting for the maintenance works.
4.1.5. Release 12.2.6
4.1.5.1. Landed Cost Management support for Project Manufacturing

Organizations
Oracle Cost Management will now support transfer of acquisition costs from Landed Cost
Management (LCM) to Project Manufacturing organizations. Purchase Order created for
Projects and their Receipts can now include estimated landed cost (ELC). Cost
management will support transfer of ELC from LCM to Projects for all costing methods
from both asset and expense subinventories. Consistent with existing functionality, users
will need to run Project Cost Collector concurrent request to transfer ELC from receipts to
projects. In addition to ELC, LCM will also transfer actual landed costs (ALC) when the
invoice for respective POs and Receipts are recorded in Accounts Payables (AP). Cost and
valuation of the original receipts could get adjusted as a result of ALC. These cost
adjustments are duly stamped with project task information and will get transferred to
Projects when the project cost collector concurrent request is run.
4.1.1. Release 12.2.7
4.1.1.1. Support for Accrual Reconciliation of Consigned Inventories

The accrual reconciliation of consigned purchase orders is processed under AP PO accruals
to differentiate from the miscellaneous accruals.
4.1.2. Release 12.2.9
4.1.2.1. Item Sub-Elemental Cost Track

The ‘Update Standard Cost’ program will enable the cost history to be tracked by
populating sub-elemental cost details history table for each cost update. This will identify
the critical sub-elements of an item are contributing to cost changes and by how much.
The new window ‘Sub-Elemental Cost Details’ in Form ‘View Cost History’ enables to
view and analyze sub-elemental cost changes.
4.1.3. Release 12.2.10
4.1.3.1. Enhanced IPV Transfer to Inventory

The ‘Transfer Invoice Variance to Inventory Valuation’ program is enhanced to support
adjustment of IPV to inventory only for the proportion of invoiced quantity that is available
on-hand and expensing the remaining quantity. This is supported based on the program
parameter, ‘Use Invoiced Quantity’ passed as ‘To Apportion by Available Onhand’. The
parameter value, No retains the existing behavior to transfer the entire IPV amount to
inventory.
4.1.4. Release 12.2.11
4.1.4.1. Costing Support for IR-ISO Returns

You can now perform IR-ISO returns. The return flow shipment from the receiving Org
begins with a IR return transaction and the receipt into the shipping Org is tracked by
means of Internal RMA transaction. This internal RMA transaction gets costed by
proportionately adjusting the forward flow transactions based on the ratio of the return
transaction compared to the receipt transaction. The flow supports both scenarios of
defining transfer price or without transfer price.
4.1.4.2. Costing Support for Centralized Procurement to Expense Destinations

with Project & Task
Centralized procurement is supported even for Expense destination and the same gets
transferred to Projects via the Receiving transaction cost collection processor. Thus
expense destination receipts get cost collected to Projects and tasks.
4.1.5. Release 12.2.12
4.1.5.1. Costing of IR-ISO Returns with Intransit Support

The IR-ISO returns functionality will support movement through intransit subinventory.
The return will be completed through the Return to Shipping Org Intransit Shipment and
Internal RMA Intransit Shipment Receipt pair of transactions. Cost Management will
process the returns through inventory and intransit inventories in such a way so as to
reverse the financial accounting of the forward flow and make sure the exchange of
goods between the two organizations takes place at the original shipping cost / transfer
price.
4.1.5.1. Costing of IR-ISO Cancellation

The IR-ISO shipments can be cancelled while they are still intransit. This intransit
location may be owned by sending or receiving organization. The cancelation is executed
against the Internal RMA Canceled Intransit Receipt transaction. Cost Management will
process the returns of the goods intransit to inventory inventories in such a way so as to
reverse the financial accounting of the forward flow (if, any) and make sure the exchange
of goods between the two organizations takes place at the original shipping cost / transfer
price (if the forward flow shipment was with FOB of Shipment).
4.1.5.2. Costing Support for Interorg Transfer of Consigned Material

Users will have the choice of whether or not to implicitly consume material (i.e move to
regular status in inventory) prior to shipping via an Interorg / Intercompany transfer. OIF
the goods are not consumed and remain in consigned status, Cost Management makes
sure that the material is not costed or accounted if it moves between the two
organizations in consigned status. Also, these quantities will not be accounted for in the
intransit, inventory or any other valuation reports.
4.1.6. Release 12.2.13
4.1.6.1. Costing of Partial IR-ISO Cancellation

Users will be able to partially cancel an IR-ISO shipment or cancel the shipment at a line
level in addition to cancelling an entire shipment. This cancelation is captured in the form
of an Internal RMA Canceled Intransit Receipt transaction. Costing will ensure the
costing at original cost or price and reversal of accounting in proportion to the quantities
being canceled. Users will also be able to correctly report valuation within inventory and
intransit when a cancelation is done.
4.1.6.2. Costing of Interorg Cancellation

Users will be able to cancel interorg shipments either partially or in their entirety. The
cancelation is captured in the form of an Interorg Canceled Intransit Receipt transaction.
Costing makes sure that all of the inventory and financial accounting is reversed at the
original cost and transfer / transportation charges. Users will also be able to correctly
report valuation within inventory and intransit when a cancelation is done.
4.1.6.1. Improved Logging for Accrual Reconciliation Load Run

If a user has missed defining a list of accrual accounts for an operating unit, to perform
accrual reconciliation for in the “Select Accrual Accounts” form, the “Accrual
Reconciliation Load Run” program will accurately report the missing setup along with
the name of the operating unit missing the setup.
4.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management

4.2.1. Overview
Oracle® Process Manufacturing Cost Management combines detailed cost-tracking
features with flexible analytical tools to help process manufacturers determine their true
product costs. Oracle Process Manufacturing Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost
Management is designed to support multiple costing methods, including standard and
actual costs, as well as lot costing. OPM Cost Management provides four possible
approaches for obtaining average actual product costs. It also supports your activity-
based costing initiatives, facilitates comprehensive “what if” analysis, produces variance
reports, conducts margin analysis, and improves your inventory-valuation accuracy.
In the converged inventory model, Process and Discrete Inventory Organizations can
potentially co-exist within the same Operating Unit. However, Discrete Costing and
Process Costing will remain distinct applications. Inventory Organizations that are
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management 11
Process Enabled will use Process Costing, while Discrete Inventory Organizations will
use Discrete Costing.
To prevent both systems from costing the same transactions, Process users are denied
access to Discrete Costing forms. Therefore, a Process-Enabled organization cannot set
up costs or costing information in the Discrete Costing application.
Additionally, in a converged environment, it is possible for inventory transfers to occur
between Process Organizations and Discrete Organizations. When such transfers occur,
both costing applications will properly account for their respective side of the transaction.
4.2.2. Features
4.2.2.1. Maintain Process and Discrete Costing Applications

With Inventory Convergence, the use of organization security is not sufficient to restrict
process organization users from using discrete forms. Discrete Costing forms, Concurrent
Programs and reports have been modified to prevent a process organization user from
accessing discrete costing setup forms, reports and other programs. This was necessary to
ensure that process transactions are not accounted for twice, once in Discrete Costing and
again in Process Costing. The changes will not affect a discrete user’s experience and
hence will be transparent.
4.2.2.2. Costing of Transfers between Discrete and Process Inventory

Organizations
As described earlier, in the converged inventory model in R12 both Discrete Inventory
Organizations and Process Inventory Organizations share the same inventory setup and
transaction model. It is expected that there will be transfer of materials from a Process
Org. to a Discrete Org. and vice versa in the normal course of business in the enterprise.
Along with the transfer of materials the cost of the material would also be transferred to
ensure that the values of inventory movements/transfers are properly tracked in the
various sub-ledgers and ultimately in the General Ledger. In addition, in the case of
organizations that use some form of Average Costing the cost of the incoming material
would also be considered for the Perpetual or Periodic averaging.
The need for this feature arises from the fact that Discrete Organizations can use a
perpetual costing method while Process organizations use Period Costing. If the material
is transferred from a Process Organization to a Discrete Organization, the cost is not
known till the end of the period while the Discrete Organization needs the cost at the time
of receiving the material.
To ensure that material can be easily transferred and accounted for, transfers between
Discrete and Process Organizations will use a transfer price. The transfer price needs to
be set up between the organizations. A new account, Interorg Profit, is defined to capture
the difference in costs in the sending organization. This difference can be wiped out at the
end of the period through a manual reconciliation process.
4.2.2.3. Subledger Accounting replaces MAC

The Manufacturing Accounting Controller is replaced by the powerful and versatile
Oracle Sub Ledger Accounting (SLA). Subledger accounting provides tools that allow
users to configure their entries for applications requiring accounting. It includes an
architecture with a unified user interface and programs that can generate accounting for
both Oracle and non-Oracle applications. The adoption of the Oracle Subledger
Accounting in Oracle Process Manufacturing supplants the existing Manufacturing
Accounting Controller (MAC) application.
The Subledger Accounting streamlines accounting by providing detailed representations
based upon transactions from various applications. Users can rapidly create predefined
accounting policies; simultaneously create multiple financial representations using
different methods and rules. Accounts are mapped in the application, and, similar to the
MAC application, you can specify detailed rules on how the accounts will be determined.
Subledger Accounting provides users the ability to configure all components of their
subledger journal entry. This include the ability to determine what lines, accounts,
descriptions and reference information would be stored on the journal entry
The Account Derivation Rules engine provides a very flexible way to determine what
account is used for each line of the journal entry. Account Derivation Rules have the
following features:
• Determine the complete account code for journal entries or
• Determine values for individual segments for the account code for journal entries or
• Create account codes based upon constants, source values, or mapping sets or
• Use conditions and default values for complex rules
Subledger accounting is an intermediate step between subledger products and the Oracle
General Ledger. Journal Entries are created in subledger accounting and then transferred
to the Oracle General Ledger. Each subledger transaction that requires accounting is
represented by a complete and balanced subledger journal entry stored in a common data
model. Subledger accounting information can be used by analytical applications, reports
and in inquiries.
4.2.3. Release 12.0.3 (RUP3)
4.2.3.1. OPM Financials: Detailed Subsidiary Ledger Report

The Detailed Subsidiary Ledger Report provides a comprehensive online inquiry based
on accounting events and journal entries and the user can drill down to the exact
transaction that resulted in the event or journal.
4.2.3.2. OPM Financials: Non-Recoverable Taxes Support in Actual Costing

Actual Costing now correctly picks up non-recoverable taxes and all accounting entries
reported by OPM Financials are correct.
4.2.3.3. OPM Financials: Reconciliation Enhancements in Actual Costing

Previously, Actual Cost only considered closed production batches in a month which
resulted in production yield quantities under reported in cost calculations as well as
double counting of yield quantities of open batches in a specific costing period. Actual
Cost, in certain scenarios, included the invoice price override but did not take the invoice
quantity into consideration. As a result of these two issues, the inventory value reported
at month end did not tie in with the inventory account balances as reported in the
Subledger and GL. Actual Costing now considers all production yield quantities in cost
calculations and considers the IPV amounts in invoices as additions to the PO Receipt
value in cost calculations.
4.2.4. Release 12.1.1
4.2.4.1. Costed Indented Bill of Materials Report

The Indented Bill of Materials (IBOM) Report is an informative and valuable feature of
Process Manufacturing available via Formulator responsibility. A Costed IBOM report
has been created allow OPM Costing users to see Standard Costing information at all
levels of Indented Bill of Materials (IBOM).
The Costed IBOM Report accesses the most recent cost rollup data and provides
summary information for the entire product BOM, with a single line for each item,
indented for each succeeding BOM level, and organized vertically so that parent/child
relationships are clearly shown. Costing summary data is presented for the Material,
Resource, Fixed Overhead, and Standard Cost Adjustment usage categories for each
product at each level of BOM. The cost component detail section of the report presents
cost component class details for the formulations shown in the summary data portion of
the report.
4.2.5. Release 12.1.2
4.2.5.1. Support for Landed Cost Management

Landed Cost (LC) is calculated in order to accurately measure the corporation’s costs and
profitability by the good/item, product line, lot, business unit, organization, etc. They
play a significant role in actual costing, evaluating on-hand inventory, as well as setting
sales prices and revenue forecasting. Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management
will use these landed costs when calculating the value of an item.
Ability to use Receiving Transactions LC for OPM Costing
The OPM costing engine is able to consider the Receiving transactions LC calculated by
LCM. As OPM requires charge allocation details to process the costing calculation,
LCM is able to calculate and store the detailed LC information at allocation level for the
receiving transactions.
Ability to use Receiving Corrections LC for OPM Costing
The OPM costing engine is able to consider the Receiving Corrections LC. LCM will
calculate and store the details of LC information at allocation level for each Receiving
Correction transactions.
Ability to use Return to Vendors LC for OPM Costing
The OPM costing engine is be able to consider the return to vendors LC. LCM will
calculate and store the details of LC information at allocation level for each Receiving
Returns transactions.
Actual Landed Cost
As a result of the acknowledgment of actual pricing information from the Payables
Invoices, LCM calculates the actual Landed Cost variations from the previous Landed
Cost calculations.
Based on this information, LCM will post the LC variation for each component type
(item, charges, and taxes) – necessary to calculate the cost variations.
New LC adjustment Import process to populate LC adjustments in
OPM
New Landed Cost Adjustment Import process populates Estimated and Actual LC
adjustments into OPM repository.
LC Adjustments support in Actual Cost Process
Actual cost process support Item and Charge component types of LC adjustments in cost
calculations. Also, Actual cost process support prorated adjustment if the adjustment is in
a period different from the receipt period.
New profile GMF: Landed Cost Adjustments Transfer Method to Inventory in Actual
Costing introduced to apply LC adjustment based on period opening inventory balance.
LC Adjustments Support in OPM Lot costing
OPM Lot Cost Process supports LC adjustments in lot cost calculations
LC Adjustments Support in OPM Accounting Pre-Processor
OPM Accounting Pre-Processor generates journal entries for LC adjustments for all OPM
cost types. New SLA event types are introduced to support LC adjustments
Modified OPM costing forms and reports for LC adjustments
• Actual cost view transactions window displays LC adjustments
• Detailed Subledger display journal entries for LC adjustments
• Lot Cost History report display LC adjustments information
Allow Process manufacturing organizations to be LCM enabled
The Inventory Organization definition form will allow the Process Manufacturing
organizations to be LCM enabled.
Landed Cost Visualization by PO
Currently, PO provides an option on the Purchase Orders (html) page to display the
Landed Cost (or acquisition cost) information as part of PO Freight and Special Charges
project.
LCM provides a new view page that summarizes the landed cost information by purchase
order. The costs amounts are summed by LC reference (e.g.: goods, freight, insurance,
etc.).
As a result of the implementation of the OPM and LCM integration, the current view
acquisition costs in PO will also display the acquisition cost information based on the
LCM data model.
Note: The display acquisition cost information from existent POs before LCM
implementation is still supported.
4.2.6. Release 12.2.5
4.2.6.1. Costing and Accounting for Outside Processing

OPM Costing supports product costing to include the service cost incurred at the option
of resource cost or the PO price for the outside processing operations. The accounting for
the outside processing operations is created using the new journal line types (ISP&PPV)
added for the Batch Step completion event.
4.2.7. Release 12.2.7
4.2.7.1. Support for Accrual Reconciliation of Consigned Inventories

The accrual reconciliation of consigned purchase orders is processed under AP PO
accruals to differentiate from the miscellaneous accruals.
4.2.8. Release 12.2.9
4.2.8.1. Ability to track Batch Close Variances at Item or Resource Level

OPM Accounting pre-processor will generate the Batch Close Variances at Item or
Resource level using SLA ADR setup based on the Item/Resource related Sources for the
Journal Line Types of Event Class, Batch Close Variance.
4.2.8.2. Early Period Close for Process Organizations

This feature enables Closing of OPM Inventory Periods even before the actual period end
date. To achieve this, Profile: CST: Allow Early Inventory Period Close should be set to
"Yes". Setting this profile to 'No' restricts closing of Inventory periods before the period
end date. Further, irrespective of the profile setting, closing of OPM Inventory
organization periods using the Inventory Close Form for OPM Organizations is no more
supported.
4.2.9. Release 12.2.10
4.2.9.1. Support for costing and accounting of cross period RMAs at Shipping
Cost
Lot Cost Processor and Actual Cost Processor are enhanced to accurately consider the
cross-period RMAs at shipping cost by treating them as cost owned transactions.
Appropriate reversal accounting entries are generated based on the shipping cost in the
event of revenue recognized and not recognized for such cross-period RMAs.
4.2.10. Release 12.2.11
4.2.10.1. Support for running multiple instances of Actual Cost Processor

You can now run the Actual Cost Processor program in parallel at a maximum number of
runs based on the value set for the profile, “GMF:Maximum Number of Parallel
Processes” where the value is allowed to have a minimum of 2 and maximum of 10
parallel runs. System automatically calculates the number of parallel instances based on
the profile value, number of operating units and transaction volumes.
4.2.11. Release 12.2.12
4.2.11.1. Purge and Archive of Cost Period Data

Extension of the purge and archive framework to execute purge and archive of the data
for a Cost Period using the following parameters:
• Legal Entity
• Cost Method Code
• Calendar Code
• Period Code
The purge will only be allowed if the period for which the purge is run falls outside the
retention policy that the customer has defined for costing data. Oracle recommends
retaining costing data for a minimum of 2 years.
4.2.12. Release 12.2.13
4.2.12.1. Purge and Archive of Accounting Data

Process Manufacturing Purge and Archive framework now supports purge and archive of
the accounting data for a Cost Period using the following parameters :-
• Legal Entity
• Cost Method Code
• Calendar Code
• Period Code
• Transaction Source
The purge will only be allowed if the period for which the purge is run falls outside the
retention policy that the customer has defined for accounting data. Oracle recommends
retaining costing data for a minimum of 2 years.
4.2.13. Terminology
Term Definition
Account Derivation Determines what account is used for each line of

Rules the journal entry
Transfer Price The Transfer Price is the price charged by one part
of a company for products and services it provides
to another part of the same company, in order to
calculate each division's profit and loss separately.
4.3. Cost Management Command Center
4.3.1. Overview
The Cost Management Command Center provides dashboards empowering cost
managers with actionable insights that help them monitor and reconcile transaction
costing and accounting, run smooth costing operations and close accounting periods on
time.
The Oracle Cost Management Command Center feature is available at no additional cost
to licensed users of E-Business Suite. It can be applied to Release 12.2.4 and above.
4.3.2. Release 12.2.8+
The following functionality requires Oracle Enterprise Command Center Framework
Release 12.2 V2.
The Period Health Check dashboards mentioned below provide cost managers a complete
overview of transaction backlog across inventory, receiving, manufacturing and
maintenance, so they can proactively mitigate severe costing backlogs and period close
delays. The dashboard intuitively guides cost managers to sources and causes of
transaction errors and bottlenecks and enables them to quickly resolve the same. The
dashboard also allows cost managers to identify patterns of issues across organizations
and periods so they can implement long term solutions for their period close problems.
4.3.2.1. Overview Dashboard

This dashboard shows a high-level picture of transaction processing and error backlog
that will affect on-time period close across all organizations that user has privileges of
access. This facilitates both ‘Required’ and ‘Recommended’ corrections.
4.3.2.2. Inventory Dashboard

An overall status section at the top displays summary of backlog in Inventory functional
area. Further tabbed regions of this dashboard cover backlogs by material transactions,
landed cost adjustments and delivery lines in shipping. Additionally, process costing
users can also see backlog associated with transaction and items that are missing costs in
a separate tab.
4.3.2.3. Receiving Dashboard

An overall status section at the top displays summary of backlog in Procurement
functional area. Further details on this dashboard covers details of Receiving
transactions backlog by dimensions like Organization and Period.
4.3.2.4. Manufacturing Dashboard

An overall status section at the top displays summary of backlog in Manufacturing
functional area. Further details on this dashboard covers details of Manufacturing jobs
or batches and associated transactions backlog by dimensions like Organization and
Period.
4.3.2.5. Enterprise Asset Management Dashboard

An overall status section at the top shows summary of backlog in Enterprise Asset
Management functional area. Further details on this dashboard cover details of EAM
Work Orders, Asset Groups and Assets.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Cost Management Command Center 18
4.3.3. Release 12.2.10+
Release 12.2 V6.
4.3.3.1. Valuation Dashboard

The Valuation dashboard will allow cost managers to perform detailed reconciliation for
the Inventory, Intransit, Receiving and WIP subledgers.
The first page under the Valuation dashboard is the WIP Valuation page which will
show batch costs and variances that were incurred and relieved during the periods being
viewed and allow cost managers to visualize cumulative to date and period to date
values in WIP as well as the ending balances for the period(s).
The dashboard is available only for process costing users, in this release.
4.3.4. Release 12.2.11+

Release 12.2 V8.
4.3.4.1. Margin Analysis Dashboard

The Margin Analysis Dashboard will allow cost managers and executives the ability to
perform multidimensional analysis of Gross Margins. Users will be able to slice and dice
the margin, COGS and revenue information against various dimensions such as time,
product category and product, customer, industry, sales channel, territory, and sales
representative. Cost managers will be able to ascertain the most profitable product mixes,
sales channels, regions and so on. They will be able to compare sales performances for
each quarter or period across years and unearth patterns of growth or downslides and be
able to take appropriate action to maximize their profits. They will be able to drill
through product category and territory hierarchies to understand the pockets contributing
to overall profitability.
The dashboard is available only for discrete costing users, in this release.
4.3.5. Release 12.2.12+
Release 12.2 V10.
4.3.5.1. Margin Analysis for Process Costing Organization

The margin analysis dashboard will allow margin analysis for process manufacturing
organizations as well. They will also be able to refine the dashboard to view only process
or only discrete organizations, if desired.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Cost Management Command Center 19
4.4. Oracle Cost Management Information Discovery
4.4.1. Overview
Oracle Cost Management Information Discovery allows users to discover transactions

and related accounting information in real time thereby providing opportunity to
effectively manage the period close process, reconcile accounting as well as ensure
accuracy of accounting across sub ledgers. There are two intuitive user-interfaces – the
Period Health Check helps to discover transactions that are both preventing or delaying
period close and the Transaction Accounting Register assists in reconciliation of
accounting for all supply chain subledgers.
Period Health Check
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Cost Management Information Discovery 20
Transaction Accounting Register
Key Features:
• Search Assistance: As End Users type in Search Box, the list of matching
values in key attributes like Organization, Transaction, Job, Receiving,
Maintenance, Project and Transfers are displayed for Period Health Check. For
Transaction Accounting Register the attributes include Organization, Job,
Account, Transaction, Receiving and Write-off
• 360 degree view of Pending Transactions and Incomplete Account Entries:
Supervisors can quickly monitor the impact of the unprocessed material and
shipping, pending transactions and interfaces and incomplete work orders on a
color-coded dashboard.
• Fully integrated with Oracle E-Business Suite: Fully integrated with Cost
Management and honors the same Organization security configured in E-
Business suite at run time instantly.
4.4.2. Support Update
• Oracle Premier Support for Oracle E-Business Suite Information Discovery Plus
products will end on December 31, 2021.
• Effective January 1, 2022, both 12.1 and 12.2 versions of the Oracle E-Business
Suite Information Discovery Plus products will move into Sustaining Support.
• Similar capabilities are available at no additional cost in Oracle Enterprise
Command Centers and other standard Oracle E-Business Suite 12.2 functionality.
• For more information, see the Oracle Lifetime Support Policy: Oracle
Applications
4.4.3. Terminology
Term Definition
PAC Periodic Average Cost method. Items are costed in a costing

process run at the end of an accounting period.
IPAC Iterative Periodic Average Cost Processor. The IPAC process
costs items that are transferred recursively between PAC cost
groups.
PAC Cost Group A group of inventory organizations whose items are costed
using Periodic Average Cost
Recursive Transfer An item that is transferred out of and into a PAC cost group
one or more times in the same accounting period.
5. New and Changed Features in Oracle Quality
5.1. Oracle Quality

5.1.1. Release 12.1.1
5.1.1.1. Quality Workbench Performance Improvements

The performance of the quality workbench (QWB) in retrieval of quality results has been
improved to ensure a better user experience. The likely situations are - retrieving quality
results from collection plans that either have many records or have complex parent child
collection plans and attachments linked to the results.
5.1.1.2. Quality Workbench Usability Improvements

The quality workbench offers certain unique feature like the hierarchy grid (H-Grid) that
provides a view as well as navigation through multilevel parent-child plans. Additional
usability enhancements to QWB in this release are listed below:
Partial Page Refresh in Quality workbench
Partial page refresh (PPR) is a significant enhancement to the existing workbench
capabilities. This feature is to ensure that when the user enters the value for a
collection plan element in a collection plan and tabs out of the field, the page
refreshes and all the actions and validations associated with the collection plan
element are executed immediately without requiring the user to wait till the page is
saved. The improvements are:
• Online actions and validations are triggered based on collection element
values as soon as the user enters a value for the collection plan element and
tabs out of the field.
• The ability to overwrite values of collection elements that have been assigned
through collection plan element actions has been provided: At present if a
value is assigned to a collection plan element through an action, then the
value cannot be overwritten. The PPR capability in the workbench will allow
overwriting the values that are assigned to a collection plan element as per
the business need.
New features and usability improvements in Quality Workbench
The following features have been provided in order to reduce the user navigation and
provide a better user experience:
• Deletion of quality results: Ability to delete collection plan records from the
workbench subject to the user having the sufficient privileges to do so.
• Export of quality results: Ability to export collection results to other
applications directly from the workbench. The users can export all the
records in the collection plan or only a subset of the records based on
filtering criteria.
• Reduced user navigation: The need for the user to navigate across multiple
pages in the application has been reduced by providing the following
capabilities:
o Multiple row entry for standalone and parent plan: Prior to this
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Quality 23
release, the option of multiple row quality results entry is available
only for quality results entered for some transactions and also for
child plans in a parent and child scenario. Multiple row entry option
will be provided in all standalone and parent plans.
o “Add Another Row” capability: The quality workbench now
provides the ability to add another row in all user interfaces for
collection result entry.
o Display H-Grid after saving quality results: This feature eliminates
the need to navigate back and forth after saving the quality results to
continue entry, update or viewing of quality results.
• Dependent collection element will remain disabled until parent element is
entered: To prevent any inconsistency that can occur when the user enters
the value for the dependent collection plan element without entering the
value for the pre-requisite element, the dependent elements remain disabled
until the user enters a value for the pre-requisite element.
Inline Quality results entry in MES for Discrete Manufacturing:
This enhancement facilitates entering quality results in the same page as that of the
parent transaction in the MES module without any additional navigation.
5.1.1.3. Shop Floor Device and Test Equipment Integration

Please refer to Section 4.8.2.2.
5.1.2. Release 12.2.9
5.1.2.1. Render Partially Accepted/Rejected Quantities in Skip Lot Inquiry Page

Skip Lot Inquiry page is enhanced to display partially accepted and rejected quantity
against a receipt.
5.1.2.1. New Public API to create collection elements

Users can create collection elements using a new public api provided with this
enhancement.
5.1.3. Release 12.2.10
5.1.3.1. Import Parent-Child hierarchical quality data through Quality

Collections Import program
Quality Collections Import program can process the new attribute, ‘Child Record Flag’
from the Collections Interface table and establish the parent-child relationship for such
collection results.
5.1.3.2. Enhanced quality results search using Quality Element Prompt

Results search on ‘View/Update Results’ form is enhanced to modify the Quality element
lov to include the quality element prompt.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Quality 24
5.1.4. Release 12.2.11
5.1.4.1. Integrating the standard Quality workbench UI with the EAM

Transactions
All the standard workbench features are made available in the EAM Quality integration
UIs
5.1.4.2. Support for Online Actions and Parent – Child relationship in EAM
Support for entering data into Parent Child hierarchical collection plans for EAM
transactions like Workorder Completion, Operation Completion, Asset Checkin, Asset
Checkout and Asset Query.
5.1.4.3. Public API to Delete Quality Results

The existing public API’s ability to bulk insert / update results through the interface is
enhanced for bulk delete the result as well.
5.1.4.4. ERES functionality in the quality workbench

ERES functionality is made available for quality through Quality workbench.
5.1.5. Release 12.2.12
5.1.5.1. Support for ERES functionality in the Quality Workbench

The Electronic Records and Electronic Signatures (ERES) functionality is extended to
Quality Workbench for quality transactions integration with EAM and iSupplier.
5.1.6. Release 12.2.13
5.1.6.1. Deferred E-Signature support for Quality Collection Plan

The deferred E-Signature support is extended to the Quality Collection Plan in the Forms
UI.
5.1.6.2. JET based Quality Charts

New JET based Quality Charts are embedded in OA page replacing the old Quality
Charts.
5.1.6.1. Skiplot and Sampling support in Receiving OA page

Support for Skiplot and Sampling Inspection of Quality transactions in Receiving OA
page.
5.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Quality Management

5.2.1. Overview
Oracle® Process Manufacturing Quality Management empowers Process companies to
enforce enterprise-wide proactive quality assurance through automated sampling and
approval workflows and ensure that materials received, produced, and shipped meet
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Quality Management 25
quality specifications. OPM Quality also assures customer and regulatory compliance
with tools to handle the expiration of materials and generation of quality certificates.
5.2.2. Features
5.2.2.1. Converged Inventory Modifications to OPM Quality

Since OPM Quality has existing links to inventory and inventory transactions, the
following modifications were required:
• Item entry and validation – A multi-segment item number is supported, and any item
entered on a specification, sample, or stability study is designated in the item master
as “Process Quality Enabled”.
• Item revisions – The item revision capability in Oracle Inventory is extended to items
in Process-enabled inventory organizations when establishing setup data and
performing inventory transactions. Support for revision-controlled items is added in
item specifications, specification validity rules, item samples, stability studies, and in
the specification matching logic.
• Specification and sample ownership – Specifications and samples are owned by an
inventory organization. The owning inventory organization will determine the list of
valid items and tests that can be placed on a specification or sample.
• Specification usage – A specification can be used by a specific inventory
organization, or it can be global and used by all inventory organizations. If several
inventory organizations can use a specification, then separate validity rules are
created, one for each inventory organization.
• Inventory specification validity rule or sample – Information that may need to be
designated on a specification validity rule or captured on a sample includes new
fields such as Subinventory and Stock Locator.
• Quality-driven inventory transactions – When sample information is used to adjust
inventory, an inventory transaction is created, with a source type of OPM Quality and
a transaction type of Sample Issue.
• Material status, grade, action, and reason code migration – Material status, grade,
quality actions, and reason code support and security will be migrated to Oracle
Inventory. Therefore, any lookups for these entities are replaced to reference the
Oracle Inventory tables.
• Lot Genealogy – OPM Quality samples and results are viewable from the Oracle
Inventory Lot Genealogy inquiry.
5.2.2.2. Enhanced Receiving Inspection

When a receipt containing Process items is routed for inspection, OPM Quality
requirements can be enforced before the goods can be delivered to inventory. This
inspection point allows a visual inspection by the receiving clerk in Oracle Quality as
well as a more detailed sample analysis by a lab technician in OPM Quality. Upon
receipt, a workflow notification is sent to take a sample based on a supplier specification
validity rule defined in OPM Quality.
This enhanced solution also leverages the Oracle Quality skip receipt inspection rules,
while enforcing a mandatory collection plan. Through this interface, the receiving clerk
can see status updates and the acceptability of the sample analysis. Based on the outcome
of inspection, the user updates the accepted and rejected quantities of the receipt in the
collection plan, which in turn updates Oracle Purchasing. After inspection, the
appropriate quantities can be inventoried or returned to the supplier.
5.2.2.3. Copying Quality Specifications
A new copy to/from function is added to the specification to allow copying across
inventory organizations. This feature expedites a “push down” approach to propagating
corporate quality standards to local facilities. The newly copied entities can be modified
to suit site-specific requirements (e.g. environmental adjustments) then submitted for
approval.
5.2.2.4. Corrective Action Request and Tracking

Wherever quality issues are found in the supply chain, there are several international
quality standards (i.e., ISO 9000, QA 9000 – 4.13, 21 CFR 820.90, and AS 9001 – Clause
8.3) that dictate the guidelines and requirements for control of nonconforming product.
A corrective action solution gives the capabilities to submit and progress a Corrective
Actions Request (CARs) through the different phases of its lifecycle: problem
identification, analysis, resolution, and corrective and preventive actions. OPM Quality
leverages the existing Corrective and Preventive Actions solution in Oracle Quality to
correspond to the converged inventory model, referencing Process-enabled organizations
and Process Quality-enabled items. The solution also provides the ability to report on
corrective actions and supporting analyses performed.
5.2.3. Release 12.2.5
5.2.3.1. Internal Order Support

Users will have the ability to create validity rules that will apply to internal orders only.
The specification matching hierarchy has been updated to respect the difference between
“external” supplier samples and “internal” supplier samples.
5.2.1. Release 12.2.7
5.2.1.1. Time Based Sampling Support

The solution provides the ability to create samples at a predetermined frequency of time
while the material is being processed. The samples will automatically gets created as per
the time-based frequency in the sampling plan associated to the specification validity rule
on the event of batch creation, batch step release, purchase order receipt and receive
material into Inventory.
5.2.2. Release 12.2.9
5.2.2.1. Parallel Approver Support

The solution provides an ability to send notifications in parallel to the multiple approvers
as per AME approval group setup for the events related to sample creation like inventory
creation, batch step release etc., sample disposition events, stability study events and lot
specific uom conversion event.
5.2.3. Release 12.2.11
5.2.3.1. Support for Distributed Sampling

The solution provides an ability to group the similar tests into unit specifications based on
the similar characteristics of tests or performed in the same lab etc. For example, the
physical characteristics, chemical characteristics and visual inspection can be segregated
into different unit specifications. The Unit specifications with different sampling plans can
then be combined into an aggregate specification applied for an item. The solution
automatically creates unit samples based on individual unit specifications and a logical
aggregate sample. Unit samples follow the regular sample life cycle gets final
dispositioned followed by the final lot disposition determined based on the aggregate
sample disposition.
5.2.3.1. Public API to Draw Samples

You can change the sample disposition of a planned sample to pending disposition by
using the new api, gmd_samples_pub.draw_samples. You can also update Lab
Organization, Sample Quantity and Dates related to Sample using the api.
5.2.3.1. Quality Sample Workflow notifications upon batch completion

You can now receive the workflow notifications to create WIP samples upon batch
completion by enabling the quality sample workflow subscription for the new business
event, oracle.apps.gme.batch.completed.
5.2.3.1. Automatic cancellation of sample group upon cancellation of all child

samples
System would automatically cancel the sample group if all the samples belonging to the
sample group are cancelled.
5.2.4. Release 12.2.12
5.2.4.1. Support Device Integration with Laboratory Instruments to Read

Quality Results
You can define laboratory instruments as plant resources in the Laboratory organizations
and associate the devices setup using Warehouse Control Systems. Quality Analysts can
capture the test results of a sample by reading from the devices automatically.
5.2.5. Release 12.2.13
5.2.5.1. Tester skill validation for a Test / Test method

The purpose of tester skill validation is to ensure the operator who handles the quality
samples have the right qualifications and required competencies to enable the tester to
perform the assigned quality functions. When recording the test results the system
validates against competency of the tester and allows to complete test result entry.
This feature leverages HRMS for defining competencies, skill levels, certifications, and
qualifications, and associating them with the employee.
5.2.5.2. Support for sample kits for a Test / Test method

User can define sample kits that are required to perform a test or a group of tests.
5.2.5.1. Equipment calibration and certification for quality test evaluation

User can calibrate and certify test equipment by defining calibration specifications,
schedule calibration events, record and evaluate calibration test data.
5.2.5.1. Support for sampling plan as per ISO standards

The solution provides the ability to define AQL sampling plans. As per ISO 2859-1, the
“Acceptance Quality Limit,” or AQL, is the lowest quality level that can be tolerated. A
batch is rejected if it contains more faulty units than the set limit defined in the standards.
5.2.6. Product Dependencies
• Oracle Inventory
• Oracle Purchasing
• Oracle Quality
5.2.7. Terminology
Term Definition
Lot Merge Lot merge can be used to merge multiple existing lots into
either an existing or a new lot.
Lot Split Lot Split is used to split a selected lot into child lots.
Lot Translate Lot translate enables users to either change the name of an
inventory lot to another name, or to convert one product to
another product. For example, you can change the lot name,
item, revision, or subinventory of an existing lot and move it
to another assembly.
Revision A particular version of an item, bill of material, or routing.
Warehouse Management The Oracle Warehouse Management System (WMS) is a
System (WMS) component of Oracle’s Supply Chain Management and
Manufacturing solution. It spans the areas of warehouse
resource management, warehouse configuration, task
management, advanced pick methodologies, and value added
services.
5.3. Oracle Quality Command Center

5.3.1. Overview
The Oracle Quality Command Center provides dashboards empowering quality inspector,
quality analyst and quality managers to quickly explore and analyze product and process
quality data within E-Business Suite, identify nonconformance sources, investigate the
root cause and take corrective action, near real time.
The Oracle Quality Command Center feature is available at no additional cost to licensed
users of Oracle Quality. It can be applied to Release 12.2.4 and above.
5.3.2. Release 12.2.9++

The following functionality requires Oracle Enterprise Command Center Release 12.2
V4.
5.3.2.1. Collection Results Dashboard

The Collection Results dashboard gives Quality Inspector, Quality Analyst and Quality
Mangers a 360-degree overview of the quality data collected either in standalone mode or
across the different transactions like Asset, Process Manufacturing, Discrete
Manufacturing and Receiving, that Oracle Quality application integrates with. The
collection results information is presented through clickable metrics, tag clouds, charts,
and results table to enable quality analyst/quality managers navigate through the
information quickly, drill into a specific collection occurrence, and update collection to
implement any corrective action needed.
The dashboard is available only for discrete orgranizations.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Quality Command Center 29
5.3.2.2. Nonconformances Dashboard
The Nonconformances dashboard enables quality mangers, quality supervisors to get an
overview of the reported nonconformances based on the severity and issue type.
Nonconformances details with respect to discrete manufacturing, process manufacturing,
receiving, asset management are also provided with clickable metrics, charts, and results
table to enable quality managers navigate through the information quickly to narrow down
on the nonconformances and take actions that are deemed fit.
5.3.2.1. Corrective Actions Dashboard

The Corrective Actions dashboard provides quality supervisors and quality managers with
an overview of the corrective actions highlighting the status and priority. The information
is presented through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable quality manger
and quality supervisor to navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific
nonconformance / corrective action and take an appropriate action to quickly resolve the
quality issues.
5.3.3. Release 12.2.10+
5.3.3.1. Sample Inspection Dashboard

The Sample Inspection dashboard provides Laboratory Managers and Quality Managers
actionable insights into sample inspections that are planned, pending for analysis and
pending for approval by highlighting the status of inspection schedules and exceptions
related to delays in inspection and tests that are not assigned to tester or resource. Sample
Inspection dashboard helps Lab Manager to expedite the sample inspection by managing
the workload assignments to tester or resources. The information is presented through
clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable Lab Managers navigate through the
information quickly, drill into a specific quality sample, and take an action to resolve the
exceptions by sample or test result updates.
The dashboard is available only for process orgranizations.
5.3.3.1. Sample Analysis Dashboard

The Sample Analysis dashboard provides Laboratory Managers and Quality Managers
insights into samples that are final dispositioned by highlighting the samples rejected and
out-of-spec tests. Sample Analysis dashboard helps Quality Manager to review the
corrective actions of the out-of-spec tests from the samples of customer, Inventory, WIP
and Supplier sources and coordinate with the respective departments to implement the
corrective actions.
5.3.4. Release 12.2.11+
5.3.4.1. Track and Trace Dashboard

The Track & Trace dashboard enables quality inspectors, quality analysts, and quality
managers to have visibility into the execution lifecycle of a nonconformance from when
it is logged and track and trace quality related nonconformances, their disposition, and
corrective actions using the Network View diagram. Using this diagram one can perform
backward and forward traceability across the transaction sources associated with
nonconformances.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Quality Command Center 30
5.3.4.1. Assign Resource pop-up action in Sample Inspection dashboard

The Sample Inspection dashboard is enabled with pop-up action link to assign a tester or
a resource to a spectic test selected. This Assign Resource pop-up action refreshes the
dashboard page and udpates the information with the changes instantly thus eliminating
the need to navigate to the Sample details forms to perform the same.
5.3.4.2. Navigate from Sample Inspection and Sample Analysis dashboards to

Genealogy & Trace dashboard
Navigate from the Sample Inspection and Sample Analysis dabhaords to
Genealogy & Trace dashboard to view the genealogy of one or more lots selected.
5.3.5. Release 12.2.12+
Release 12.2 V10.
5.3.5.1. Reorganization of Collection Results and Nonconformance dashboard

pages
The existing Collection Results and Nonconformance dashboard page layouts are
reorganized to separate each domain specific collection results for better navigation/deep
link integration and visibility. The reorganized pages has sub tabs namely Discrete,
Process, Receiving, Asset Management and All Collections. The metrics were modified
to reflect domain specific metric counts.
5.3.5.2. Navigation into Collection Results dashboard from Enterprise Asset

Management Command Center
The Collection Results dashboard is enhanced to accept navigation from Enterprise Asset
Management Command Center for Assets and Work Orders dashboard pages into All
Collections tab of Quality Command Center. A return navigation is also provided back to
Enterprise Asset Management Command Center.
5.4. Oracle Quality Information Discovery

Support Update
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Quality Information Discovery 31
Applications
Oracle Quality Information Discovery is a new revolutionary information discovery

application from the Oracle E-Business Suite Information Discovery solution set. It
allows Quality Analysts, Shop floor Managers and Production Control personal to
quickly explore and analyze product and process Quality data within E-Business Suite,
identify nonconformance sources, investigate the root cause and take corrective action,
near real time.
5.4.1.1. 360 Degree View of all Quality Information

Oracle Quality Information Discovery provides simple and intuitive data discovery
and analysis capabilities on the Quality data collected either in standalone mode or
across the different transactions like Asset, Process, Manufacturing and Receiving,
that Oracle Quality application integrates with. It provides unique, easy to use
powerful search, data discovery capability for Quality analysts to instantly find
answers to ad hoc questions that are otherwise difficult to answer. For example,
• How many nonconformances have been logged for an Item across different
organizations and their types?
• Which user owns the most number of high severity nonconformances?
• What are the corrective actions that have been taken to avoid recurrence of a high
number of scraps and improve yield on a Discrete Job?
5.4.1.2. Advanced Search on Quality Data

• Search and refine quality results using collection elements, both seeded and user
defined
• Search across quality collection plans and hierarchies
• Search across all quality organizations
• Search both structured and unstructured quality data
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Quality Information Discovery 32
5.5. Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite
5.5.1. Discontinuation Notice
Oracle is discontinuing Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business
Suite as of August 3, 2018. Oracle will support this app, but will not deliver any new
updates to the app.
• The app will remain on the Apple App Store and Google Play with the latest client
version delivered, as long as technically feasible. Apple and Google may remove
apps that no longer meet their technical requirements.
• The corresponding MAA file for the latest client version is available on the Oracle
Software Delivery Cloud.
• Oracle will continue to deliver REST services for selected functionality in this app
for use in custom app development.
Customers who have installed this app will continue to receive technical support
including access to online support tools, knowledge bases, pre-existing fixes, and service
request resolution. As of August 3, 2018, error correction support will no longer be
available for this app.
Additionally, Oracle will not certify this app with any further operating system updates,
new devices, or new Oracle E-Business Suite releases after its discontinuation date.
Oracle will continue to assist you to the best of our ability; however, we are unable to
provide any new fixes.
5.5.2. Overview
With Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite,
Manufacturing Quality Managers can monitor production quality inspection of current
work orders and take action on the go.
- Search or barcode scan Jobs to view inspection status
- Assign recently moved / completed Jobs for inspection
- View Jobs with quality rejects and scraps
- View quality collection results, specification limits and reported defect / non-
conformance
- Perform quick actions like update disposition and other fields, add comments and
attach pictures
- Update shopfloor status and collaborate in context using device features such as
email, phone and text
Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite is compatible with
Oracle E-Business Suite 12.1.3 and 12.2.3 and above. To use this app, you must be a user
of Oracle Discrete Manufacturing with Quality module and mobile services configured on
the server side by your administrator.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite 33
5.5.3. Mobile Release 5.0 – Client Version 1.4.2
5.5.3.1. Mobile Foundation Release 5.0 Updates
• Ability to open links to external websites within the app on iOS device
• Updated look and feel, including native look and feel for action sheets on
iOS devices
• Ability to open links to external websites within the app for Android
devices
• Ability to easily clear user credential fields in the Sign In page
• Technical updates with uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework
(MAF) 2.3.1
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Mobile Discrete Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite 34
5.5.5.1. 3.6.5.1. Mobile Foundation Release 7.0 Updates
• Ability to import custom CA or self-signed server certificates to standard

apps for TLS connections to Oracle E-Business Suite
• Ability to download the mobile app configuration automatically from the
server
(MAF) 2.4.0
5.6. Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite
Oracle is discontinuing Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business
Suite as of August 3, 2018. Oracle will support this app, but will not deliver any new
updates to the app.
5.6.2. Overview
With Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite, Quality
Managers can monitor quality inspection of the laboratory samples and take action on the
go.
- Search or barcode scan samples or Items or lots to view the progress of the samples and
tests
- View the sample details, test details and warnings associated
- Perform quick actions like change disposition of the sample, evaluate test results and
assign resources to tests
- Attach pictures to the quality results and collaborate in context using device features
such as email, phone and text
Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite is compatible with
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite 35
of Oracle Process Manufacturing and mobile services configured on the server side by
your administrator.
• Ability to open links to external websites within the app

iOS devices
(MAF) 2.3.1

server
(MAF) 2.4.0
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Mobile Process Quality Manager for Oracle E-Business Suite 36
6. New and Changed Features in Outsourced
Manufacturing
6.1. Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing
6.1.1. Overview
Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing, formerly known as "Oracle Outsourced
Manufacturing for Discrete Industries Plus" is available at no additional cost to licensed
users of Oracle Discrete Manufacturing or Oracle Process Manufacturing.
6.1.2. Release 12.1.1
6.1.2.1. Buy/Sell Subcontracting

Buy/Sell Subcontracting is a business practice where an Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) outsources the complete manufacturing of an assembly to a
Manufacturing Partner (MP) and sells the components (used to build the assembly) to the
MP. The timing of sale is usually when the OEM ships the components to the MP. A
company can implement Buy/Sell Subcontracting when it has the following business
needs;
• Ownership of Subcontracting Components
When the subcontracting components are sold, the ownership is transferred from
an OEM to the MP. MP is fully responsible for the component inventory,
damage, etc.
• Receivables and Payables
Cash receipts from the sale of subcontracting components and payment for
purchase of assemblies are treated as independent business transactions.
Therefore, Receivables and Payables are usually not netted – OEM pays the MP
for purchasing the outsourced assembly and the MP pays for buying the
subcontracting components from the OEM.
Buy/Sell Subcontracting functionality is supported from this release with the following
features;
• Planning at OEM and MP
Planning considers the OSA (outsourced assembly) requirements in OEM and
appropriately plans for the constituent components required at MP.
• Goods Movement between OEM and MP
Creation of Subcontracting Purchase order triggers automatic creation of the
requisite sales and purchase orders to enable the movement of components from
OEM to MP. Also, the discrete jobs required to assemble the OSA at MP are
automatically created. Both synchronized shipment and prepositioned material
movements are supported.
• Inventory Tracking and Visibility at MP
Through online visibility into the component stocks available at the MP, the
OEM can effectively plan for the components that need to be shipped to the MP.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing 37
Further any unforeseen consumptions can be manually reconciled using a
workbench.
Buy/Sell Subcontracting functionality helps you to easily track and manage your
outsourced manufacturing activities with your partners.
Note: Buy/Sell Subcontracting feature is supported for all countries and costing methods
(Standard, Average, FIFO & LIFO).
6.1.3. Release 12.1.3.4
6.1.3.1. Full Outsourcing

Full Outsourcing, also referred as Contract Manufacturing or Subcontracting assembly is
a business practice where an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) outsources the
complete manufacturing of an assembly to a Manufacturing Partner (MP) and Supply the
components (used to build the assembly) to the MP, but retains the ownership of the
components . A company can implement Full Outsourcing when it has the following
business needs
• Outsourcing the assembly to MP: When the OEM plans to have the complete
Sub assembly or the finished assembly manufactured at a Manufacturing
partner's facility without the need for any internal manufacturing.
• Ownership of the Subcontracting Components:

When the subcontracting components are shipped, the ownership of the
components is still retained with OEM and component value is accounted and
reflected in the OEM book of accounts as inventory at MP site.
• Drop ship components: OEM intends to drop ship components from

Component Supplier to manufacturing partner.
• Drop ship Assembly: OEM intends to drop ship assembly from MP site to
Customer after MP completes the manufacturing of the assembly.
• Outsourcing support for WMS and EAM enabled Organizations:

Full outsourcing co-exists with WMS and EAM enabled inventory organizations.
• Manufacturing Partner supplied components in the outsourced assembly:

In addition to the components supplied by the OEM to the MP, the OEM can
additionally include components intended to be supplied by the MP in the BOM.
However, the OEM can never plan or ship these components to the MP but use it
only from an Engineering perspective. The MP may procure or manufacture
these components in-house, to use them in manufacturing the assembly and
charge OEM as part of value addition.
• Software components in the outsourced assembly: OEMs can include

intangible components like software, in the outsource assembly BOM, plan them
but never physically ship them to MP. MP can download this software from
software vendor’s site and install them in the assembly as part of the
manufacturing process.
Full Outsourcing functionality is supported from this release with the following
features;
• Planning at OEM and MP: Planning considers the OSA (outsourced
assembly) requirements in OEM and appropriately plans for the components
required at MP.
• Goods Movement between OEM and MP: Creation of Subcontracting

Purchase Order triggers automatic creation of the requisite sales and
purchase orders to enable the movement of components from OEM to MP.
Also, the discrete jobs required to assemble the OSA at MP are automatically
created. Both synchronized shipment and prepositioned material movements
are supported.
• Inventory Tracking and Visibility at MP: Through online visibility into

the component stocks available at the MP, the OEM can effectively plan for
the components that need to be shipped to the MP. Further any unforeseen
consumptions can be manually reconciled using a workbench.
• Accounting of Component Inventory: When OEM ships components to

MP, component inventory value is debited to an intransit account. Intransit
account is an asset account and can be rolled up to the balance sheet,
reflecting the inventory value at MP site as an asset in the balance sheet.
When the Assembly is received from the MP, component value is credited
from the intransit account, reflecting the reduction of inventory (consumed in
the manufacturing of the assembly) and asset value in the balance sheet
Full Outsourcing functionality helps you to easily track and manage your
Note: Full Outsourcing feature is supported for all countries and with ‘Standard
Costing’ method only
6.1.4. Release 12.2.5
6.1.4.1. Outsourcing to Internal Organizations (Internal Toll Manufacturing)

Outsourcing to Internal Organizations, also referred, as Internal Toll Manufacturing is a
business practice where one organization of the company outsources some set of
assemblies to another affiliated company. In this process Organization acting as OEM
Supply the components (used to build the assembly) to the affiliated company (MP), but
retains the ownership of the components.
All Feature/Functions supported in Full outsourcing (section 4.12.2.1) are also applicable
to Internal Toll Manufacturing with the following additional functions
• OEM and MP organizations in different OU/Legal Entities
In Internal Toll Manufacturing both OEM and MP organizations can be in different
Operating Units/Ledgers/Legal Entities. MP Organization supports all feature
functions like Discrete Jobs, Flow Schedules, WMS, EAM, and Serial Tagging etc.
except organization enablement as OPM (Oracle Process Manufacturing).
• Internal MP Organization to Outsource assemblies
Internal MP organization can outsource assemblies to another Internal MP/third party
MP and can play dual role of OEM and MP based on the business need. All the
costing transactions from Internal Organizations can be transferred to GL like any
other inventory organizations. Also, all the receiving, shipping and Manufacturing
functions can be carried out normally.
6.1.4.2. Configure (CTO/ATO) and Outsource Configured Assemblies
This feature allows companies to configure items (ATO/CTO) and Outsource configured
assemblies (*Items) to Third party or to Internal MP organizations. Following are key
aspects of this feature
• At the time of Configuring these ATO/CTO items, Configuration process creates *
items, assemblies in both OEM and MP organizations. If the MP is internal
organization, then routings are copied to MP organization (For External MP
organizations routings are not copied).
• Supply chain Cost rollup program ignores sourcing rules and considers component
cost in OEM org for Cost rollup and this program also updates list price of *Item
with the OSP charge.
• When the subcontracting PO is created for the *Item assembly, List price is stamped
as PO price of the *Item assembly in item master
This Featured is supported for both Buy/sell and Full outsourcing flavors of the
Outsourcing process.
6.1.4.3. Lot and/or Serial Genealogy

This feature allows companies to track lot and/or Serial genealogy of the assemblies
outsourced to third-party or Internal Organizations. OEM organizations can view the
genealogy from OEM inventory genealogy screens.
• If the MP organization is Internal Organizations Lot and Serial Genealogy is
Supported
• If the MP organization is externalz then only Lot genealogy is supported.
6.1.4.4. Terminology
Term Definition
Prepositioned Components Components are shipped to the MP without reference to any

subcontracting order ahead of assembly requirements. When
the subcontracting order is created, these components are hard
allocated.
Synchronized Components Components are shipped to the MP with references to specific
subcontracting orders, along with the order.
6.1.5. Release 12.2.6
6.1.5.1. Enhanced Allocation and Adjustment Processing

With this enhanced allocation and adjustment processing, users would be able to
auto update allocations in OEM organizations with component consumptions against WIP job
in MP Organizations for any under or over consumptions. This is applicable only for the
internal MP organizations.
Users would also be able to de-allocate component items to subcontracting
orders. Below are the two business cases where the de-allocation of component items would
help as below:
• When user wants to free up allocations from existing subcontracting orders and then
re-allocation from scratch is done by the interlock manager.
• When user wants to de-allocate from an existing subcontracting order/RSO and re-
allocate to another subcontracting order using the interlock manager.
With this enhancement, Physical/Cycle count for component items in internal
MP organization would adjust allocations in the corresponding OEM's replenishment SOs.
6.1.5.2. Other Enhancements
Users would be able to auto receive the drop ship RPOs for an internal MP. For
direct ship RSOs, it would be optional and controlled through the auto-receiving concurrent
program parameter.
User would be able to default the sub-inventory for common component items
during receiving against the respective replenishment PO. It would help users to receive the
common components specified for subcontracting process into designated sub-inventories.
In case of component drop-shipping, there would be a linkage created between
the drop-ship PO created from the drop-ship SO and the corresponding RPO created by the
interlock manager.
In case of internal MP, the work order would be pegged to the subcontracting
sales order in the MP organizations. This is to ensure to have one to one pegging of the work
order to subcontracting sales order.
6.1.5.3. Endeca Information Discovery Enhancements

User would be able to view the un-invoiced subcontracting PO receipt details in
the financials tab in the Endeca dashboard.
6.1.6. Release 12.2.8
6.1.6.1. Full Outsourcing Support for Process Manufacturing

Full Outsourcing, also referred as Contract Manufacturing is a business practice where an
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) outsources the complete manufacturing of a
finished product to a Manufacturing Partner (MP) and supply the ingredients used to
produce the product to the MP, but retains the ownership of the ingredients. A company
can implement Full Outsourcing when it has the following business needs
• Outsourcing the complete manufacturing of the product to MP: When the
OEM plans to have the finished products or intermediate products completely
manufactured at a Manufacturing partner's facility without the need for any
internal manufacturing.
• Ownership of the Subcontracting ingredients:

When the subcontracting ingredient items required to produce the product are
shipped, the ownership of the ingredient items is still retained with OEM and
value of the ingredient items is accounted and reflected in the OEM book of
accounts as inventory at MP site.
• Drop ship ingredient items: OEM intends to drop ship ingredient items from
ingredient Supplier to manufacturing partner.
• Drop ship Product: OEM intends to drop ship product from MP site to
Customer after MP completes the manufacturing of the product.
• Outsourcing support for WMS and EAM enabled Organizations:

Full outsourcing co-exists with WMS and EAM enabled inventory organizations.
Full Outsourcing functionality is supported from this release for the process
manufacturing with the following features;
• Planning at OEM and MP: Planning considers the Outsourced product

requirements in OEM and appropriately plans for the ingredients required at
MP.
• Goods Movement between OEM and MP: Creation of Subcontracting
Purchase Order triggers automatic creation of the requisite sales and
purchase orders to enable the movement of ingredient items from OEM to
MP. Also, the production batches required to manufacture the outsourced
product at MP are automatically created. Both synchronized shipment and
prepositioned material movements are supported.
• Inventory Tracking and Visibility at MP: Through online visibility into

the ingredient item stocks available at the MP, the OEM can effectively plan
for the ingredient items that need to be shipped to the MP. Further any
unforeseen consumptions can be manually reconciled using a workbench.
• Lot Genealogy Support: This feature enables tracking and tracing of the
products outsourced to MP showing the history of the lots consumed in the
manufacturing of the product.
• Accounting of Ingredient Inventory: When OEM ships ingredients to MP,

ingredient inventory value is debited to an intransit account. Intransit account
is an asset account and can be rolled up to the balance sheet, reflecting the
inventory value at MP site as an asset in the balance sheet. When the product
is received from the MP, ingredient value is credited from the intransit
account, reflecting the reduction of inventory (consumed in the
manufacturing of the assembly) and asset value in the balance sheet
Full Outsourcing functionality helps you to easily track and manage your
Note: Full Outsourcing feature is supported for all countries and with ‘Standard
Costing’ method only.
6.1.6.2. Outsource Manufacturing Information Discovery Support for Process

Manufacturing Organizations
Outsource Manufacturing Information Discovery is enhanced to support the process
manufacturing organizations. Process Manufacturing users can get a complete and
real-time visibility into the overall health of the outsourced manufacturing business
using the rich user interface powered by Information Discovery. Various aspects of
the business such as subcontracting order status, inventory balances, financial
position, and quality issues can be visualized intuitively using these interfaces.
6.1.7. Release 12.2.10
6.1.7.1. Group all the components of a Subcontract Purchase Order into a single
Replenishment Purchase Order and a single Replenishment Sales Order
For the multiple component requirements generated for a subcontracting
assembly of a subcontracting purchase order, the Interlock manager program
would now create one single replenishment purchase order and one single
replenishment sales order for all the components together.
6.1.7.2. Enhanced setup diagnostics to support internal toll and full outsource
for process manufacturing
The setup diagnostics report is enhanced to support ‘Internal Toll for Discrete
Manufacturing’ flows and ‘Full outsourcing for Process Manufacturing’
flows. The setup information related to organizations, component items,
assembly, purchasing, receiving, order management etc. is included in the
report and setup related issues are flagged.
6.2. Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center

6.2.1. Overview
The Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center provides dashboards
empowering buyers and subcontracting supervisors to gain actionable insights that help
manage the outsourcing business run efficiently to meet the customer commitments,
resolve component replenishment issues, outsourced assembly quality issues, and manage
financial status.
The Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center feature is available at no
additional cost to licensed users of Discrete Manufacturing and Process Manufacturing. It
can be applied to Release 12.2.4 and above.
The Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center feature also depends on base
product features available in Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing RUP 12.2.4 and above.
6.2.2. Release 12.2.8+
Release 12.2 V2
6.2.2.1. Order Status Dashboard

The Order Status dashboard gives buyers and subcontracting supervisors a 360-degree
overview of the current subcontract and replenishment orders highlighting the status of
schedules and exceptions related to delays in schedules, identifying unallocated material
requirement and delayed component shipments to manufacturing partners. The
information is presented through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable
buyers and subcontracting supervisors navigate through the information quickly, drill into
a specific subcontract order and/or replenishment order and notify manufacturing
partners/suppliers to expedite the shipments.
6.2.2.2. Financials Dashboard

The Financials Dashboard provides buyers and subcontracting supervisors with
an overview of the on-hand inventory, component consumption patterns at
various manufacturing partner sites, assembly rejections and un-invoiced
assembly receipts/component shipments. The information is presented through
clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable buyers and subcontracting
supervisors navigate through the information quickly to narrow down on a
specific component/assembly related to a manufacturing partner having quality
issues, excess consumptions and negotiate with manufacturing partners to
improve their manufacturing process efficiency.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center 43
6.2.3. Release 12.2.9+
Release 12.2 V3
6.2.3.1. Conditional formatting of metrics in Order Status dashboard

The metrics of Order Status dashboard are formatted with different colors based on the
metric is informational or alert.
6.2.3.2. Wildcard search in refinements of Order Status and Financials

Dashboards
The refinements are allowed with wildcard search for all the attributes in the available
refinements of the Order Status and Financials dashboards.
6.2.3.3. Default sort criteria in the Results Table

The Attribute groups are provided with the default sort criteria in the results table of
Order Status and Financials dashboards.
6.2.4. Release 12.2.9++

Release 12.2 V4
6.2.4.1. Support for saved search

The saved search feature enables you to save the applied filters. Using the saved search
feature, you can apply the filters quickly on the dashboard.
6.2.4.2. Export the results table in csv format

The results table of Order Status and Financials dashboards provide an option to export the
table data in a csv file format.
6.2.4.1. Compare the records of results table

You can compare attributes of multiple records selected in the results table.
6.2.5. Release 12.2.10+

Release 12.2 V6
6.2.5.1. Load subcontract order data based on profile

The Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center data load program is modified to load
the orders updated in the day set as per the site level profile, JMF: ECC Full Load Days.
6.2.6. Release 12.2.11+
Release 12.2 V8
6.2.6.1. Track and Trace Dashboard

The Track & Trace dashboard enables subcontracting supervisors to have visibility into
entire outsourcing process for a Subcontract order end-to-end from OEM organiation to
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Outsourced Manufacturing Command Center 44
MP organization, including any raw material suppliers for components. Using the
Network diagram, supervisors can track outsourcing documents for a subcontract order
such as Replenishment Sales Orders, Replenishment Purchase Orders, Drop Ship
Requisitions and Purchase Orders, Work Order and Subcontract Sales Order. Supervisors
can dentify any shipping bottlenecks from Manufacturing Partners, quality rejections of
received assemblies and reasons for over or under consumption of components to take
timely action.
6.2.7. Release 12.2.12
Release 12.2 V9
6.2.7.1. View Timeline in Order Status Dashboard

The subcontract orders can be viewed on a timeline basis using the new Timeline Viewer
visualization switch provided in the results table of the Order Status dashboard.
6.2.8. Release 12.2.12+

Release 12.2 V10.
6.2.8.1. Track & Trace Subcontract Order Execution using Timeline Viewer
The Track & Trace dashboard enables the Outsourcing Manager to visualize the
subcontract order execution in a multi dataset Timeline Viewer. The Timeline Viewer
display events related to Subcontract Orders, Replenishment Sales Orders, Work Orders
and Quality Inspections.
6.3. Outsourced Information Discovery

Support Update
Applications
A business user can get complete and real-time visibility into the overall health of
the outsourced manufacturing business using the rich user interface powered by
Endeca. Various aspects of the business such as subcontracting order status,
inventory balances, financial position, and quality issues can be visualized
intuitively using these interfaces.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Outsourced Information Discovery 45
6.3.1.1. 360 Degree View of Outsourced Manufacturing Business
Key Performance Indicators and metrics provide quick answers to simple business
questions like:
• How many subcontracting orders are delayed and which customers are impacted?
• What’s the value of our material at manufacturing partner locations?
• What’s the value of defective finished goods received from manufacturing
partners?
• What’s the value of uninvoiced subcontracting orders and replenishments?
• What is the value of outsourced products that had quality problems?
• Detailed analysis on any metric can be done using a comprehensive set of charts
and tabular data on the user interface. Using the guided navigation, Google-like
search capabilities, and tag clouds, the user can quickly get to the subcontracting
orders that need immediate attention. Outsourced manufacturing data across
manufacturing partners is presented together to allow for quick comparison to
differences.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Outsourced Information Discovery 46
7. New and Changed Features in Discrete Manufacturing
7.1. Oracle Bills of Materials

7.1.1. Release 12.2.11
7.1.1.1. Public APIs for resource definition

New public APIs are available to add, update, or delete employee of person type resource
and equipment of machine type resource.
7.1.1.2. Public APIs for resources and resource instances definition under
department
New public APIs are available to add, update, or delete owned resource under
department. Also, you can add, update, or delete employee instances or equipment
instances from department resource.
7.1.1.3. Public APIs for standard operation definition

New public APIs are available to create or update standard operations. Also, you can add,
update, or delete resources and alternate resources in standard operation.
7.1.1.4. Public APIs for setup standard operation definition

New public APIs are available to create or update setup standard operations. Also, you
can add, update, or delete resources in setup standard operation.
7.1.1.5. Schedule multiple resources in parallel in standard operation

This feature supports scheduling multiple resources in parallel in standard operations
using the schedule flag ‘Prior’ or ‘Next’. This is similar functionality that is available in
routing definition.
7.1.1.6. Public API for transferring engineering items to Manufacturing

You can now transfer the engineering items, BOM and routing to Manufacturing using
public API.
7.1.2. Release 12.2.12
7.1.2.1. Allow Dual UOM Enabled Items as Assembly and Components in Bills
of Material
Bills of Material definition supports dual unit of measure items as assembly,
components, and substitute components. The component quantities are entered in
primary unit of measure. This functionality is supported for both Manufacturing and
Engineering BOMs via FORMS, Interfaces and APIs.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Bills of Materials 47
7.1.3. Release 12.2.13
7.1.3.1. Mass change resources in Routings using public API

User can mass change resources in Routings using public API for the following use
cases.
• Add a new Resource in Routings
• Update resource details in Routings
• Replace an existing resource with a new resource in Routings
• Disable an existing resource in Routings
7.2. Oracle Bills of Material Command Center

7.2.1. Overview
The Bills of Material Command Center enables users to efficiently manage product
configuration and change order implementations. You can use key metrics, drillable
graphs, tag clouds, and network diagrams that are available in the dashboards to explore
product configurations, manage products, and perform impact assessments on change
orders
The Oracle Bills of Material Command Center feature is available at no additional cost to
licensed users of Oracle Bills of Materials. It can be applied to Release 12.2.4 and above.
7.2.2. Release 12.2.11+

Release 12.2 V8
7.2.2.1. Bills Dashboard
Bills dashboard enables product managers, product engineers, manufacturing

engineer and production managers to search for bills of material across
manufacturing bills or engineering bills and view the ones with pending changes.
It provides a 360-degree overview on bill of materials information including

details of the assembly, organization, alternates, and revisions. The information is
presented through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable product
engineer, manufacturing engineer to quickly search for manufacturing bills or
engineering bills and view bills with pending changes. Also ensure that you use
the Bills dashboard to navigate to the Indented Bills dashboard.
7.2.2.1. Indented Bills Dashboard
Indented Bills dashboard enables product managers, product engineers,

manufacturing engineer and production managers to view and analyze the
indented (multilevel and exploded) manufacturing or engineering bills of material
of a manufacturing or engineering item using a network diagram.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Bills of Material Command Center 48
It helps to view, track and trace the manufacturing or engineering bill of material
for manufacturing or engineering items in a network diagram. Using the diagram
component one can visualize graphically the assembly and monitor component
changes and their effectivity dates.
7.2.2.2. Change Orders Dashboard
The Change Orders dashboard provides a 360 degree overview on change orders including
the details of revised items, and revised components. The information is presented
through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable product engineer,
manufacturing engineer to quickly view and analyze the complete lifecycle of an
engineering changes and efficiently manage product configuration.
7.2.3. Release 12.2.12

Release 12.2 V9
7.2.3.1. Item Revision and Additional Attributes Included in Dashboards

The network node details are changed to accommodate revision number, Item
attributes such as User Item Type and Item Status as seen in the components
section of Bills form. Results table displays the primary or alternate BOM based
on the type of it. Item revision is included as part of the Change Orders, Revised
Items and Revised Components tabs of the results table.
7.2.3.2. View Timeline in Change Orders Dashboard

The Change Orders dashboard page provides an ability to view the change order
management in a timeline viewer with option to switch between the result table
or the timeline viewer.
7.2.3.3. Support Sequential Data Load to Load Data in all Dashboards

Users will have the flexibility to load the data to the command center using
concurrent program by having a sequential data load process. The program can
be run by passing the parameters, organization code, alternate and reset flag.
While loading alternates, by default the data set populates primary bills too. The
incremental load now considers the changes in item master to reflect in all
dashboards.
7.2.4. Release 12.2.12+
Release 12.2 V10.
7.2.4.1. Navigation links provided across dashboard pages

New links are provided for seamless navigation to other dashboard pages. The
navigation links are as follows:
- Bills dashboard to Indented Bills

- Indented Bills to Change Orders dashboard
- Indented Bills to Item Detail HTML page
- Change Orders dashboard to Indented Bills
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Bills of Material Command Center 49
- Change Orders dashboard to Item Detail HTML page
- Items Dashboard to Indented Bills to analyze “Item Where Used”
7.2.4.2. Tooltips for timeline events in the Change Orders dashboard
Tooltips are enabled on all timeline event nodes in Change Orders and Revised
Items results table timeline view.
7.3. Oracle Work In Process

7.3.1. Release 12.2.4
7.3.1.1. Support for Contingent Worker

This customer driven enhancement includes support for adding contingent workers as
resources on an Oracle WIP Work Order. Contingent workers work for companies on a
non-permanent basis and can include consultants or outside contractors. This is a very
common practice in manufacturing operations.
7.3.1. Release 12.2.9
7.3.1.1. View On-hand Quantity across subinventories during Material Issue

Transactions
Users can view the on-hand quantity across subinventories while performing the
material issue transactions for the components in the WIP Material transactions form.
7.3.1.2. Ability to recompute the required quantity based on Assembly Over

Completions/Scrap
System would recompute or retain the required quantity of the components when
performing assembly over completions and scrap transactions using the WIP parameter.
7.3.1.3. Ability to update move transaction dates

Users can update the move transaction dates based on the profile setting, “TP: WIP
Move Transactions Data Updatable”. By default, the profile option is set to Yes.
7.3.1.4. View Sales Order demand information for Completed Work orders
Users can track the sales order demand information in the Discrete Jobs form for work
orders post completion and sales orders fulfilment.
7.3.1.5. Group Work Orders for Multiple Sales Order Lines in Auto Create
Final Assembly Program
Auto Create Final Assembly program would create one single work order for the
consolidated quantities of multiple sales order lines for the same Item, Organization and
BOM Revision, based on the parameter, “Group Work Orders” set to Yes. By default,
the parameter is set to No and one work order per one sales order line is created.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Work In Process 50
7.3.2. Release 12.2.10
7.3.2.1. Reserve Component Items of a Discrete Job

Upon creation of a job or release of a job, system would automatically create org level
reservations based on the WIP parameter, Automatic High-Level (Org level)
Reservation. User can also create a detailed reservation by entering the details manually
in the reservation form that is integrated with the Discrete Jobs Components form. The
feature is currently applicable for non-wms enabled organizations only.
7.3.2.2. Allow Component Pick Release with Reservable Supply Subinventory

Component pick release program would allocate the material honoring the existing
reservations and transfer the reservation to the supply subinventory upon transacting the
move order.
7.3.2.3. Trigger Business Events for WIP Move and WIP Completion
Transactions
User can configure business events for WIP Move and WIP Completion transactions by
subscribing to different actions such as invoking a REST service or launching a work
flow or sending a notification etc. The configured business events would be triggered
based on the profile setting, WIP: Work Order Completion Business Event set to Yes.
The value by default is set to No.
7.3.2.4. Display supply details for lower level ATO items in Supply to Order
Workbench
Supply to Order workbench is enhanced to display the supply details of lower level
make type ATO, along with displaying the supply details of top-level configuration
items.
7.3.3. Release 12.2.11
7.3.3.1. Prevent closing discrete job when open requisitions or PO exists

System can be setup to prevent closing discrete job when there are open purchase
requisitions or purchase orders associated to the discrete job.
7.3.3.2. Update WIP accounting class for existing work orders

System can be setup to updating the WIP accounting class changes in existing work
orders.
7.3.3.3. Use OTL Timecard page to capture resource instance usage details
WIP is integrated with OTL application. User can capture usage details using the OTL
Timecard page and charge resource transactions for discrete jobs / flow schedules.
7.3.3.4. Reserve Component Items of a Discrete Job in WMS organizations

Item components can be reserved for discrete jobs for WMS organizations.
7.3.3.5. Configure Change Order Notifications using Custom hook

You can now configure to enable or disable the FYI notifications for specific type of
order update. You can also configure the recipient of the notifications using custom
hook.
7.3.3.6. Flexibly Copy Cross References while creating the configured item
You can now copy the cross references selectively using a custom hook provided while
creating or updating the configured item during CTO process.
7.3.3.1. Flexibly consider List price defined at the Inventory Organization level
or the PO Validation Org level for the items
The list price calculation in CTO process can now consider the list price defined at the
inventory organization level or PO Validation org based on the profile setting.
7.3.4. Release 12.2.12
7.3.4.1. Transact Dual UOM Items in Material Transactions

Based on business requirement, discrete manufacturers need to track inventory in two
different units of measure. This functionality is incorporated into discrete jobs which
allows to transact material in dual unit of measure. When the item is dual unit of measure
control enabled, during transactions, users are prompted to enter the quantity in both
transaction UOM and secondary UOM and can query on hand balances in Inventory in
both primary and secondary UOM.
It allows to enter both transaction UOM and secondary UOM in the following user
interfaces.
• WIP Material Transactions FORMS
• MSCA Material Transactions
• MSCA Serial Transactions
• Material transaction using Interfaces for WIP
7.3.4.2. Generate OSP Shipment Lines and Print Shipping Documents

System supports generating the shipment lines and printing shipping documents for the
material required to be shipped to OSP supplier.
By running the concurrent program, “Manage OSP Shipment Lines”, the partially
finished assemblies (intermediates) moved to OSP operation, and the components
associated to the OSP operation are created as shipment lines.
Shipping user can ship partially finished assemblies and components to the supplier from
the Shipping Transactions and generate the required shipping documents like Packing
Slip report, Bill of Lading report, Commercial Invoice report and Vehicle Load Sheet
Details report. Packing Slip report contains the information related to the OSP item,
component items and purchase order.
7.3.4.3. Flexibility to Update Purchase Requisitions Created from CTO

CTO AutoCreate Purchase Requisitions program creates the requisition interface records
in “Incomplete” status so that users can update the requisition created before approving it.
This is controlled by a custom hook function, get_authorization_status of
CTO_CUSTOM_PURCHASE_PRICE_PK package.
7.3.4.4. Display Lower-Level Supply Details for Buy Type Items in Supply to
Order Workbench
Supply to Order Workbench displays lower level buy type supplies, Internal/External
Requisitions and Purchase Orders.
7.3.4.5. Support Match for Config Items in Inactive Organizations
CTO Config Item Creation processing considers the config items in inactive
organizations for matching.
7.3.5. Release 12.2.13
7.3.5.1. Associate Serial Numbers to Work Order using WIP Mass Load
Ability to associate Out of Stores Serials for a non-standard discrete job using the
wip_job_dtls_interface WIP Mass Load.
7.3.5.2. Mass update of item reservations

Item reservations supports automatic high level item reservations and manual
reservations. For work orders which did not go through item reservation, when material
was not available at the time of reservation, or receive a high priority work order,
manually reserving items for such work orders is time consuming. This enhancement
allows to create or update item reservations for multiple work orders automatically using
a concurrent program based on reservation rules.
7.3.5.3. Create Requisitions for PO Move Resources without initiating workflow

Create requisitions for PO Move resources without initiating workflow. It eliminates
displaying multiple workflow notifications in the work list.
7.3.5.4. Allow material transactions with multiple lots for dual UOM items via
MSCA
Ability to transact materials with multiple lots for dual UOM enabled component items
via MSCA.
7.3.5.5. LPN assembly completions for dual UOM items in WMS organizations
In MSCA, allow dual UOM enabled items and transact both assembly and component
items during LPN assembly completions in WMS organizations for assembly
completions, flow schedules and work orderless completions transactions.
7.3.5.6. Ability to AutoCreate Configuration Items for a specific operating unit

A new Operating Unit parameter is introduced in AutoCreate Configuration Items
program to create config items in a specific operating unit.
7.3.5.7. Allow AutoCreate Final Assembly (AFAS) to create work orders based
on fixed number of work orders or fixed work order quantity
AFAS program is enhanced to create work orders based on fixed number of work orders
or fixed work order quantity for a given sales order line quantity. This feature is enabled
using a custom hook.
7.3.5.8. Ability to create a single requisition per sales order

Ability to create a single requisition by grouping all the sales order lines of a sales order.
This feature is enabled by setting Order Management system parameter ‘Group
Requisitions By Sales Order’ to ‘Yes’.
7.4. Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Command Center
7.4.1. Overview
The Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Command Center provides dashboards empowering
production managers, production supervisors, and quality managers with actionable
insights that help manage production operations run efficiently to meet customer
commitments, resolve production quality issues, and manage outside processing
operations effectively.
The Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Command Center feature is available at no additional
cost to licensed users of Oracle Discrete Manufacturing. It can be applied to Release
12.2.4 and above.
7.4.2. Release 12.2.8+

Release 12.2 V2
7.4.2.1. Work Order Status Dashboard

The Work Order Status dashboard gives production managers and production supervisors
a 360-degree overview of the current production work orders highlighting the status of
production schedules related to delays in schedules, finding unissued material
requirement and identifying material shortages. The information is presented through
clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable production supervisors navigate
through the information quickly, drill into a specific production work order, and take an
action to resolve the exceptions and expedite the work order.
7.4.2.2. Production Quality Dashboard

The Production Quality dashboard enables production mangers, production supervisors,
and quality managers to get an overview of the production quality status for the completed
and in process work orders. The dashboard shows details of the quantum and value of
scrap produced as well as rejection and rework quantities. The information is presented
through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable quality managers navigate
through the information quickly to narrow down on the production work orders with
quality issues and find the reasons like, for example quality non-conformances, and
material defects.
7.4.2.3. Outside Processing Dashboard

The Outside Processing Dashboard provides production supervisors and production
schedulers with an overview of the current outside processing operations highlighting the
status of outside processing operations related to delays in schedules, in progress
assemblies in supplier premises and identify supplier issues. The information is presented
through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable production supervisors and
production schedulers navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific
production work order with outside processing operations issues and take an action to
quickly resolve any bottlenecks to meet on time delivery commitments.
7.4.3. Release 12.2.9+

Release 12.2 V3
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Command Center 54
7.4.3.1. Identify component shortages and find substitute components in Work
Order Status dashboard
The Work Order Status dashboard is enhanced to display Top 10 Components with
Shortage Quantity. It will help users to easily identify shortage of component item and
perform action by finding Substitute Component and issue of material.
7.4.3.2. Insight into Assembly Scrap and Rejection quantities by Reasons in

Production Quality dashboard
The Production Quality dashboard is enhanced to display bubble charts showing
• Bubble chart in Scrap tab page shows Scrap Quantity, Scrap value and Scrap
Reasons for Top 10 Assemblies.
• Bubble chart in Reject tab page shows Rejection Quantity, Rejection value and
Rejection Reasons for Top 10 Assemblies.
7.4.3.3. Metrics to highlight outside processing operation delays in Outside

Processing dashboard
The Outside Processing dashboard is enhanced with additional metrics in summarization
bar to display the number of suppliers with Not Started operations, with Start and
Completion Delay, number of operations with Start Delay.
7.4.4. Release 12.2.9++

Release 12.2 V4
7.4.4.1. Descriptive flex field search for the work order and related entities
All dashboards are enhanced to refine using descriptive flex field attributes of work order
and related entities. Also, these attributes are displayed in the Results tables.
7.4.4.2. Display dashboards for single organization

Dashboards can be configured to display data for single or multiple organizations
depending on business and data security requirements.
7.4.4.3. Apply refinements using multiple data sets

User can apply refinement filters from multiple data sets and get insights.
7.4.4.4. Ability to save search criteria

7.4.4.5. Export data from Results table in csv format

The results table provides option to export the table data in a csv file format.
7.4.4.6. Compare attributes of multiple records from results table

You can compare attributes of multiple records selected from the results table using
Compare action link.
7.4.5. Release 12.2.10
Release 12.2 V5
7.4.5.1. Navigation to Quality Nonconformances dashboard from Production

Quality dashboard
The Production Quality dashboard is enhanced to navigate to Quality Nonconformances
dashboard page of Quality Command Center to see nonconformances and corrective
actions table in Quality.
7.4.5.1. Display First Pass Yield Metric in Production Quality dashboard

The Production Quality dashboard is added with new metric, First Pass Yield to show the
cumulative first pass yield percentage across the completed assemblies.
7.4.5.2. View attributes of result table by attribute groups in all dashboards

The results table provides option to view the details of a record by attribute groups.
7.4.6. Release 12.2.10+

Release 12.2 V6
7.4.6.1. Assembly Completions Dashboard

The Assembly Completions dashboard provides visibility into assembly completions in
the production shop floor highlighting the assembly completions and returns that are
performed with or without discrete jobs. The information is presented through clickable
metrics, charts, and results table to enable production supervisors, operation managers
and production managers navigate through the information quickly, monitor and report
assembly completion transactions periodically, quickly identify key reasons for
assembly returns, and drill into a specific production work order to analyze the assembly
completion and return transactions.
7.4.6.2. Genealogy & Trace Dashboard

The Genealogy & Trace dashboard provides product traceability and impact analysis
capabilities in a network diagram to visualize end-to-end supply chain and
manufacturing information comprising of purchase orders, material lots, work orders,
production serial units and sales orders. The information is presented in a network
diagram with clickable nodes to enable quality analyst and quality manager navigate
through the network quickly, trace the network forward and backward to track the
source of material lots consumed in specific production work orders and the customers
to whom those production units were/are being shipped, understand the broader impact
of specific material lot from its consumption pattern and drilldown to take action on the
specific material lot, serial unit, sales order etc.
7.4.6.3. Display Timestamp for the date attributes in all dashboards

Dashboards are enhanced to display accurate dates along with timestamp details.
7.4.6.1. Refine Delay Durations in Work Order Status dashboard

The Work Order Status dashboard is enhanced to refine work orders by delay duration
in day, hour, or minute units.
7.4.6.1. Navigate to Item dashboard from Work Order Status dashboard
You can now navigate to the Item dashboard page to view item definition and attributes
for a selected item in the Work Order Status dashboard.
7.4.6.2. Display Assembly In Progress Quantity of OSP operations in Outside

The Outside Processing dashboard is enhanced to display assembly In Progress Quantity
metric and charts to give a view of quantity of assemblies in progress OSP operations.
Also, buyer name is added in the results table to view buyer information.
7.4.7. Release 12.2.11

Release 12.2 V7
7.4.7.1. Display Scrap and Reject Serial Units in Genealogy & Trace dashboard
Genealogy & Trace dashboard is enhanced to display Scrap and Reject serial units along
with the completed serial units.
7.4.7.2. Display Organization or Operating Unit information in the entity node

in Genealogy & Trace dashboard
The network diagram component is enhanced to display four attributes as part of the
node display and Genealogy & Trace dashboard displays Organization or Operating
Unit information as part of the entity node.
7.4.7.3. Display Indicator Icons in the Entity node of Genealogy & Trace
dashboard
The network diagram component is enhanced to display indicator icons for the entity
nodes based on different attributes of the node. Genealogy & Trace dashboard displays
out of the box indicator icons for the below
• Work Order - Number of Units Rejected or Scrapped out of Total quantities or
work order on hold
• Serial Unit – Scrapped, Rejected
• Purchase Order - On Hold status
• Sales Order - On Hold status
Genealogy & Trace dashboard also displays indicator icons configured by the user
for the below
• Lot - Lot Status or Lot Grade

• Serial - Serial Status
7.4.7.4. Find Similar nodes based on common attributes in Genealogy & Trace
dashboard
The network diagram component is enhanced to find similar nodes that are common to
the attributes selected from a node. For example, using Find Similar, you can find all the
lots matching a specific grade in the network diagram.
7.4.7.1. Multiselect nodes of same type and compare attributes
You can compare all the attributes of selected nodes of same type. For example, you can
compare multiple lots to compare attributes of different lots. You can compare multiple
work orders to compare attributes of different work orders.
7.4.7.1. Export Network content as screenshot or csv format

You can export the network diagram component as a screenshot in svg or png format or
you can export the diagram as a csv file.
7.4.7.2. Display At Receipt Assembly Serial Units of non-serialized work orders

in Production Quality dashboard
The Production Quality dashboard is enhanced to include At Receipt assembly serial
units of non-serialized manufacturing work orders along with completed serial units
from serialized work orders.
7.4.7.1. Navigation from other dashboards to Genealogy & Trace dashboard

You can select multiple serial units or multiple work orders from Work Order Status,
Production Quality, Outside Processing and Assembly Completion dashboards and
navigate to Genealogy & Trace dashboard. The dashboard will show network diagram
after applying the selected serial units or work orders as filters.
7.4.8. Release 12.2.11+

Release 12.2 V8
7.4.8.1. Quick update pop-up action in Work Order Status dashboard

The Work Order Status dashboard is enabled with quick update pop-up action link to
update the status of a work order or reschedule the work order. It eliminates the
navigation to Discrete Jobs FORMS to change the work order status or reschedule the
work order. Also, the Quick update action refreshes the dashboard page and updates the
information with the changes instantly.
7.4.8.2. New Timeline Viewer component in Work Order Status dashboard

The Work Order Status dashboard is enabled with Timeline viewer in the Work Orders
and Operations results table. It allows you to switch between the table and timeline
viewer. In the Work Orders results table, Timeline viewer displays the timeline of one or
more work orders by different work order date attributes. Similarly, in the Operations
results table, Timeline viewers displays the timeline of one or more operations for a work
order or across work orders by operation date attributes. Also, action links are enabled on
the Timeline viewer nodes for more actions.
7.4.8.3. View Project and Task details in Work Order Status dashboard
Navigate from the Work Order Status dashboard to Projects dashboard page in Project
Manufacturing Command Center to view project and task details.
7.4.8.4. View work orders having corresponding sales orders overdue in Work
Order Status dashboard
A new metric “With Sales Orders Overdue” in Work Order Status dashboard allows you
to drill and view the work orders having corresponding sales orders overdue. It helps to
prioritize work orders accordingly.
7.4.8.5. View pending inspection quantities of OSP Operations in Outside

Navigate from Outside Processing dashboard to Receiving dashboard page in Inventory
Command Center to view the expected receipts and receipts pending inspection of
outside processing operations.
7.4.8.6. Additional action links in Genealogy & Trace dashboard

The Genealogy & Trace dashboard is enhanced with additional action links on the
following nodes for more actions.
• Lot node
o Material Workbench
o View Lot Transactions
o View Collection Results Dashboard
• Serial node
o Material Workbench
o View Serial Transactions
• Work Order node
o View Work Order Status Dashboard
o View Move Transactions
o View Nonconformances Dashboard
• Batch node
o View Batch Detail
o View Batch Status Dashboard
o View Production Quality Dashboard (Process)
7.4.8.7. View Outsourced Manufacturing material genealogy in Genealogy &

Trace dashboard
The Network diagram in Genealogy & Trace dashboard is enhanced to view the
outsourced manufacturing material genealogy between the OEM, suppliers, and
Manufacturing Partners (MPs).
7.4.8.8. Color pinning of bar charts in Work Order Status, Production Quality
and Outside Processing dashboards
The bar charts are enhanced with color pinning feature. The bars displaying work order
statuses in Work Order Status dashboard and operation statuses in Production Quality
dashboard and Outside Processing dashboards are seeded with specific colors.
7.4.9. Release 12.2.12+
Release 12.2 V10.
7.4.9.1. Work Order Execution Track and Trace in Work Order Status
dashboard
The Work Order Status dashboard is enabled with Work Order Execution Track & Trace
and multi dataset Timeline viewer in the Work Orders and Operations results table. The
Work Order Execution Track & Trace is presented in a network diagram with clickable
nodes which enables production supervisor visualize routing operations, component
requirements and manufacturing resources. Users can track Job Operation status,
Operation start and finish delays, quality rejections and scrap using the indicators on
Operation nodes. It also allows users to track material issue status, shortages, material
returns and resource charging detail for timely actions. Using the new Timeline viewer
user can diagnose work progress delays by accessing event timeline related to job moves,
material issues, returns, quality inspection, nonconformance reporting, resource charging
etc. to take necessary action to meet schedule commitments.
7.4.9.2. Granular Delay metrics in Work Order Status dashboard

In Work Order Status dashboard, Delayed metric is replaced with 3 granular delay
metrics such as Start Delayed, Finish Delayed and With Operations Delay which enables
user to drill on the work orders having start delay, work orders with finish delay and
work orders with Operations delay respectively. It helps to prioritize and execute the
delayed work orders accordingly.
7.4.9.3. Organization and Date Range parameters in Data Load programs

The data load concurrent programs support loading data for one or more plants
(Organizations) at a time and for a given time range using Full & Sequential data loading.
It allows user to select an organization in the concurrent program and load the data for the
specific organization. It provides configurable time fence days (profile option) for In
Progress/Open work orders for loading from tables in ECC cache. User will be able to
load data for specific organization quickly for a given time fence days and then view the
information in dashboards.
7.4.9.4. Results table column values color badging and conditional formatting
The results tables are enhanced to display Work Order Status in specific color badges in
all results tables and Serial Completion Status in specific color badges in Assembly Serial
Numbers results table. The Start Delay in Days and Completion Delay in Days values are
displayed in red color font in Work Orders and Operations results table.
7.4.9.5. Network and Timeline Viewer node display enhancements

The Genealogy & Trace Dashboard network diagram nodes as well as single dataset
timeline viewer nodes in Work Orders and Operations results table, the icon background
colors are enhanced with specific colors using Redwood based color style.
7.4.10. Release 12.2.13

Release 12.2 V11.
7.4.10.1. Work Order Delays Dataset Optimization
Work Orders and Work Order Delays datasets are merged for improved performance.
7.4.10.2. Enable Dataset parameter as a LOV field in data load programs

The Dataset parameter is enabled as a LOV field in all the Discrete Manufacuturin
Command Center data load programs. It helps user to select a specific dataset and run
the concurrent program.
7.4.10.3. Limit Component node display in Work Order Execution Track &
Trace network diagram
Work Order Execution Track & Trace network diagram will display components for
following supply types
• All components with Push supply types
• Components with other supply types (with shortage only)
7.5. Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Information Discovery

7.5.1. Overview
Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Information Discovery is a new revolutionary information
discovery application from the Oracle E-Business Suite Information Discovery solution
set. It allows shop floor users to quickly find actionable information in real time,
improve their productivity and meet customer commitment. It enables customers manage
their manufacturing operational costs and leverage their investment in Oracle E-Business
Suite Discrete Manufacturing and Manufacturing Execution Systems for Discrete
Manufacturing.
Real Time 360 Degree view of Discrete Work Orders
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Discrete Manufacturing Information Discovery 61
Key Features:
• Real Time Work in Process Progress Insights: In order to achieve high
productivity and efficiency on the shop floor, it is critical that the managers and
supervisors have real time view of the shop floor at their fingertips. Oracle
Discrete Manufacturing Information Discovery provides the real time view of
the shop floor work orders, across organizations and departments that the users
have access to. It empowers the shop floor users to gain quick insights at both
high level and at granular level on the work order information by syncing
discrete work order data from E-Business Suite manufacturing as frequently as
desired, up to near real time. Supervisors can quickly monitor the impact of the
delayed work orders on a color-coded dashboard and get to the reasons for
specific delays like components shortages, resource shortages, open exceptions,
quality issues etc very quickly.
• 360 Degree View of Current Work Orders: In a traditional search, user would
need to specifically know the exact search criteria on what they were looking for
and had a limited view of the results. The revolutionary search interface guides
the shop floor managers and supervisors to visualize the real time issues on the
shop floor. It provides a 360 degree view of open work orders for both in-house
and outsourced manufacturing operations. The extension allows the shop floor
users with a shopping type of experience to explore all relevant work order data
to uncover the manufacturing bottlenecks and take corrective action quickly to
meet their customer commitments. The new dynamic and modern user interface
guides the user towards discovering answers to questions of specific interest
faster in the context of managing current challenges on the floor. Endear search
allows employees to immediately access the most critical manufacturing work
orders rapidly and manage components shortages, resource bottlenecks and other
shop floor exceptions to avoid customer order delays.
• Manufacturing Exceptions Management: Exception data is graphically
displayed so that a user can quickly identify the customers and jobs impacted. A
dashboard highlights the most frequent number of unresolved exceptions with the
ability to drill down to analyze the root cause and take corrective actions.
Supervisors can quickly view the customers impacted because of shortages and
find available substitutes. A spreadsheet like view of all exception data –
impacted job, Operation sequence, date reported and contact and exception notes.
• Work in Process Quality and Cost Variance Insights: Graphically identify the
work orders and assemblies that are impacted by scrap and rejects reasons to
discover current quality issues in the shop floor quickly. Quickly identify the jobs
and customers with low yield rate data to take remedial actions and improve
productions efficiency. Identify the jobs where cost variances are high.
• Outside Processing Operation Insight: Quickly identify subcontract order
delays early and adjust production schedules to meet on-time customer delivery
and as necessary, identify alternate supplier to help mitigate outside processing
quality non-conformance problems.
• Modern Technology with Mobility: In-memory technology platform, Key
production metrics, Mobile user friendly interactive summary charts, alerts, tag
clouds and Guided navigation for work order information discovery, search
structured attributes and unstructured text like exception notes, assembly, and
component description etc.
• Fully integrated with Oracle E-Business Suite: Seamless navigation to work
content pages in Manufacturing Execution systems for Discrete Manufacturing
and work order FORM in Work in Process. Honors the same Organization
security configured in E-Business suite at run time instantly.
Applications
7.5.3. V5
7.5.3.1. Discrete Work Orders

• Department View: New Chart to display work order operations and Status from
Department centric visibility. Many dimensions to slice and dice the operation
level information.
• Serialized Assembly Viability: Users can get related Serialized Assembly
information for the work orders they have discovered and get specific serial
assembly information like serial number, status etc. Guided navigation provides
refinements around serial assembly related attributes.
• Additional Derived Attributes: Many derived attributes are added for Work
Order discovery / refinement. Job Start Delay Days/Flag, Job Completion Delay
Days/Flag, Operation Start Delay Days/Flag, Operation Completion Delay Days/Flag,
Job Start Early Days/Flag, Job Completion Early Days/Flag, Operation Start Early
Days/Flag, Operation Completion Early Days/Flag, Ship Date Approach Days/Flag, Ship
Date Past Due Days/Flag, Ship Date Approach Days/Flag, Ship Date Passed Days/Flag,
Assembly Base Model.
• Descriptive Flex Support: Users can search using following descriptive flex
fields Discrete Job, Operation Information, Serial Number and Serial Attributes.
• Action Links: Many actions links are added to directly access FORMS UI for
Work Order update as well as MES pages. There are drill down links from result
context to access Quality Information Discovery, Inventory Item Master
Information Discovery, and Depot Repair Information Discovery
• Attachment search: Discrete Job and Operation level Short Text, Long Text and
URL attachments can be searched. The attachment search requires full load
refresh data for open work orders. A periodic full load refresh needs to be
scheduled to load updated Short Text, Long Text, and URL attachments.
7.5.3.2. Project Manufacturing

• Oracle Project Manufacturing Visibility: Leverage alerts, graphs, charts, and
key summarized metrics to identify potential risks to project performance and
take immediate action. Dashboard access lets you quickly view important
information about projects, work orders, tasks or task assignments that can
potentially affect the schedule or profitability and make quick updates. You can
use the alerts, charts, graphs, and metrics provided out-of-the-box or easily and
quickly configure your own.
Features include:
• 360 Degrees of Projects– Using the new project search and overview, alerts help
you discover the projects at risk. Use the alerts provided to identify late or
unapproved projects or easily configure your own. Use the cost analysis graphs
and charts to compare actual costs and identify the projects with the best or worst
performance against their cost budgets. The project delays chart helps you
quickly see the projects that have not started on time and the summarized metrics
provide at-a-glance financial totals for the projects in your operating unit.
Project Manufacturing Search and Overview Alerts and Summarized Metrics
• Project Dashboard access to project, work orders and task information using
alerts, graphs and summarized metrics
• Guided Navigation - Find projects, tasks, work orders and assignments
• Interactive tables with detailed project, work order, task and plan information
reduces navigation to multiple pages
• Use quick links to initiate project actions or update multiple tasks in a single
update
7.5.4. V6
7.5.4.1. Work Order-less Transaction Visibility

• Users can discover the various Work Order less transactions from the results
table based on the guided navigation refinements. It brings visibility into the
various work order-less schedules transacted like transaction type, quantity,
reason, date when transacted, location etc. Further users can get related serialized
assembly, component and resources information.
7.6. Oracle Mobile Discrete Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite
Oracle is discontinuing Oracle Mobile Discrete Production Supervisor for Oracle E-
Business Suite as of November 1, 2022. Oracle will support this app, but will not deliver
any new updates to the app.
• The app will remain on the Apple App Store and Google Play with the latest
client version delivered, as long as technically feasible. Apple and Google may
remove apps that no longer meet their technical requirements.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content DocumentOracle Mobile Discrete Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite 64
• The corresponding MAA file for the latest client version is available on the
Oracle Software Delivery Cloud.
• Oracle will continue to deliver REST services for selected functionality in this
app for use in custom app development.
request resolution. As of November 1, 2022, error correction support will no longer be
7.6.2. Overview
With Oracle Mobile Discrete Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite, discrete
manufacturing supervisors can monitor work in process and take quick actions on the go.
- Search or barcode scan work orders to view progress (on track, delayed, on hold,
exceptions)
- View work order and operations detail
- Perform quick actions like expedite, hold, release, unrelease, reschedule, cancel and add
notes
- View component issue and resource charges
- Manage production exceptions related to assembly, components, resources and quality
- Collaborate in transaction context using device features such as email, phone and text
Oracle Mobile Discrete Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite is compatible
with Oracle E-Business Suite 12.1.3 and 12.2.3 and above. To use this app, you must be a
user of Oracle Discrete Manufacturing, with mobile services configured on the server side
by your administrator. Users of Oracle Manufacturing Execution System for Discrete
Manufacturing get additional capability for exception management.

• Improvements in login and configuration flow
• Ability to change server URL without reinstalling app
• Diagnostics improvements
7.6.3.2. Accessibility Improvements

There are accessibility improvements in the Work Orders Tile page, Related Information
contextual tab bar, and Person contact card.
7.6.3.3. Client Time Zone Support in Work Order Summary Tiles page
Client time zone support is available in the Work Order Summary Tiles page.
7.6.3.4. Landscape Display Support Improvements

There are landscape display improvements for the Work Order Number in the Work
Order list, and in the Work Order Detail page header.
7.6.4.1. Android Support

In previous versions, Oracle Mobile Discrete Manufacturing for Supervisor for Oracle E-
Business Suite was available only for iOS devices. Starting with version 1.2.0, the app is
now available for Android devices as well.

• Changes to support both iOS and Android with the same client code
• Ability to update server URL from Connection Details page
7.6.5.1. Support for read only access:

The mobile login responsibility can be configured to allow Read Only Access for
the app without update actions.
7.6.5.2. Reschedule Work Orders

Work orders can now be rescheduled from within the Mobile application
7.6.5.3. Additional MES details

Users can now drill down for more detail from MES Component and Resource
Exception detail pages.
7.6.5.4. Truncate prefix and suffix characters during barcode scanning.

Administrators can implement an extension to truncate certain number of prefix
and suffix characters during barcode scanning for Work Order, Assembly, and
Assembly Serial Number barcodes.
• Support for enterprise distribution

• Customization support for corporate branding
• Support for Web SSO authentication to delegate authentication to Oracle
Access Manager (OAM)
7.6.5.6. Translation Support.

This app is available in the following languages: Brazilian Portuguese, Canadian
French, Dutch, English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Latin American
Spanish, Simplified Chinese, and Spanish.
7.6.6.1. Support attachments for work orders, operations and MES exceptions
View all types of attachments and upload images for work orders, operations and
MES exceptions
7.6.6.2. Search Work Orders by Sales Order and Assembly Description

Ability to search work orders based on Sales Order number and Assembly
Description. Users can configure the searchable attributes from the settings.
7.6.6.3. Filter work orders based on Job Class and Job Type
Ability to filter work orders based on Job Class and Job Type from the app
settings.
• User installation and usage metrics for administrators

• Updated look and feel for selected app interaction
• Uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF) 2.2.2
• Ability to open links to external websites within the app on iOS device
iOS devices
• Ability to open links to external websites within the app for Android
devices
(MAF) 2.3.1

server
(MAF) 2.4.0

• For apps installed through an Enterprise Mobility Management (EMM) solution's
app catalog, support for having the EBS Server URL preconfigured by an
administrator rather than requiring users to enter it after launching the app
• Enhancement to prevent attachments viewed within the app from being shared
elsewhere on iOS devices
• Technical updates with uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF)
2.5.0

2.6.1
7.6.12.1. Uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF) 2.6.3
• Oracle E-Business Suite Mobile Foundation Release 9.1 implements Oracle

MAF 2.6.3.
7.7. Oracle Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Discrete Manufacturing

7.7.1. Overview
To remain competitive in today’s global marketplace, several businesses have adopted a
“Distributed Manufacturing” model by running multiple manufacturing facilities located
across the globe. Adopting this approach helps in reducing costs, improving agility to serve
local markets and most importantly, gives the ability to retain control on the manufacturing
process execution globally.
In such environments, it is quite likely that each manufacturing plant within a business may
either be running a unique set of applications or relying on a centralized system (such as
ERP) to perform the day-to-day manufacturing functions. For businesses that have
deployed a centralized system for reporting manufacturing activities, at times, shop floor
work progress is hindered due to the non-availability of the application system. This could
be for reasons such as planned maintenance, network issues, etc. In yet other situations
where several manufacturing applications are used across plants, it is essential that systems
working at a plant level are connected to each other or a corporate level system (such as
ERP) for global monitoring of manufacturing operations. Hence, it is extremely imperative
for these businesses to have an application framework that supports:
• 24x7 plant level manufacturing operations
• Real-time event driven operations management
• Global visibility, and control of manufacturing processes across multiple plants
and multiple applications
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content DocumentOracle Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Discrete Manufacturing 69
7.7.2. Release 12.1.1
7.7.2.1. Serialized Manufacturing

To improve product traceability and genealogy, many production environments require
that an assembly serial number be identified and associated with the product at either the
start of production, or at a specific step within the production process. In the past, in-
process serialized transactions were supported only through Mobile Supply Chain
Applications. In this release, MES for Discrete Manufacturing supports this functionality
by allowing operators to query one or many serial number(s) to retrieve work content
information, easily record component serial information and quality results, and perform
transactions. Operators can also continue to use the dispatch list, which will list both
serialized and non-serialized assemblies in their queue.
7.7.2.2. Shop Floor Device and Test Equipment Integration

Most shop floor environments have test equipment or other devices that capture
information about the product being produced. To allow more automated quality data
collection, this release will allow this device data to be captured directly into a quality
collection plan associated with the move, scrap, reject, complete and return assembly
transactions in the MES module. In addition, device data can also be collected in the
standalone quality entry mode. The device integration has been enabled through the
KEPServerEX MES Connector provided by Kepware Technologies (Oracle Certified
Partner) to connect to the shop floor devices.
7.7.2.3. Electronic Records and Signatures (ERES)

Electronic Records and Electronic Signatures (ERES) capability is required to support
FDA’s 21 CFR Part 11compliance for medical device manufacturers who need to adhere
to the functional requirements of the quality system specified in 21 CFR Part 820. In this
release, ERES capabilities have been provided for moves, completions, returns and
component material transactions associated with the discrete jobs in the MES
workstation. Any quality information collected as part of the MES transactions are also
included as part of the electronic record.
7.7.2.4. Improved Supervisor Dashboard

To aid the supervisor in managing his organization’s shop floor performance, additional
metrics have been added to the supervisor’s dashboard: Production to Plan by
Department, Labor Performance (Efficiency, Productivity and Utilization), First Pass
Yield, and Defective Parts per Million. In all cases, the supervisor can see a summary
view of performance for the past week when he or she enters the dashboard, and then can
drill to additional details. To support the labor performance metrics, shift in and shift out
capability has been added, and data can be imported from a time and attendance system.
Extending the theme of capacity shortages view in Release 12, additional tools have been
provided in this release. To aid decision making during shop floor execution, the
supervisor will have two views – a work order view that provides information on
component and resource shortages at the work order level; the second view provides a
view of the potential component shortages. From the work order view, supervisors can
then change the job status as appropriate based on the information provided to ensure
smoother shop floor execution.
7.7.2.5. Printing Shop Floor Documentation

The focus of the MES module has been to provide all the information required so that the
shop floor operator can perform and complete the production operations. However there
are situations where it is required to print all the information that is pertinent to a
manufacturing work order so that it can accompany the physical parts and assemblies
through the production process on the shop floor. From this release, operators and
supervisors can view and print a configurable job traveler and/or labels from MES for
Discrete Manufacturing.
7.7.2.6. Usability Enhancements

A major focus of this release has been to improve the overall usability of the MES
workstation. Examples of enhancements in this area include the addition of inline quality
results entry so the user doesn’t have to navigate to a separate page to enter quality
results, user sorting capabilities on the dispatch list, exception history visibility, an
association between exception types and reason codes.
In addition, to add flexibility to the system two new hooks (client) are being introduced:
• Ready-Status: In addition to the current seeded criteria, the ready-status in the
dispatch list also depends on the ready-status hook’s returned result. Customers
can implement their own validation by plugging in custom code in this hook.
Example of custom logic may be checking whether a sales order is on hold, all
components haven’t been picked, etc.
• Transaction Validation: Move, scrap, reject, and completion transactions are
disallowed if the custom validation implemented in this hook fails. Examples of
custom logic may be implementing tooling validation logic, or checking to see if
all push-type materials have been issued.
7.7.2.7. Labor Skill Validation

The purpose of Labor Skill Validation is to ensure the operator who handles the
manufacturing activities and the quality inspector who handles the inspection activities
(as part of the manufacturing operations) have the right qualifications and required
competencies at appropriate skill levels and required certifications to enable the operator
to perform the assigned functions. ISO quality standards and also regulatory requirements
for specific industries mandate companies to execute and document employee
competencies.
In this release, the MES for Discrete Manufacturing can check for required skills for the
operator who performs the operation when the operator clocks into a job operation or
during critical move transactions, such as move, scrap, reject or return transactions. This
check leverages HRMS for defining competencies, skill levels, certifications and
qualifications, and associating them with the employee.
7.7.3. Release 12.1.2
7.7.3.1. Ability to Perform Manufacturing Execution without any Dependency

on the ERP System
Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Discrete Manufacturing module enables
manufacturers to deploy Oracle Applications directly as their shop floor execution system
without complex and costly integrations with third party manufacturing execution
solutions. Currently, MES works on top of Oracle WIP and requires the Oracle E -
Business Suite production instance to be up and running for performing shop floor
transactions through MES. Because of this dependency, shop floor personnel do not have
a way to report transactions through MES if the central ERP production instance is
temporarily unavailable due to bandwidth issues (especially in remote locations),
patching or in the event of any other maintenance activity being carried out. To reduce
this dependency, an implementation option is now provided using the Oracle Data
Integrator (ODI), to run the MES application independently, in a standalone mode,
allowing shop floor personnel to report transactions even when the central ERP
production instance is down. The transactions reported through MES are synchronized at
a later point of time when the backend ERP system is functional. This is especially
important in large companies with multiple facilities and having operations around the
globe.
7.7.3.2. Support for Detailed Routing Step in MES

From mfg execution perspective, niche MES solutions maintain detailed routing steps
within their solution to report and track the progress made in production. However, the
corresponding routing maintained in the ERP system is simplified and represents the key
steps for costing of material and resources. Detailed routing steps are maintained in MES
and have a mechanism/representation to indicate the operations/steps that need to be
reported back to ERP.
7.7.3.3. Ability to Interface with Oracle E-Business Suite Releases Prior to

Release 12
Currently, MES for Discrete Manufacturing is available for deployment on Release 12
and above. Several existing customers running on 11i10 have opted to use MES on top
of their current EBS installation. MES is now able to interface and work with Oracle E-
Business Suite releases prior to Release 12, specifically Release 11i10.
7.7.3.4. Web Services for Work in Process (WIP)

Web services are being provided for key WIP transactions. As part of this enhancement,
web services are provided by exposing business logic contained within Oracle forms
through Java APIs. These web services are cataloged in the Oracle Integration Repository
and can be browsed though Oracle Integration Repository Browser Interface under
respective product family node. By Clicking on the Business Entity in Integration
repository, you can view full description, list of web services for that business entity
along with the description of the web service, whereas description of parameters can be
seen from the xsd definition of the service available via the generated wsdl.
The following web services are provided for WIP:
• WIP Discrete Job: Create WIP discrete job
• WIP Move Transaction: Create WIP Move Transaction
• WIP Completion Transaction: Create WIP Completion Transaction
7.7.3.5. Simplified UIs for Users

Using Oracle ADF, the web services being provided in WIP can be leveraged to easily
create custom-made simplified UIs for shop floor operators as an alternative to out of the
box UIs.
7.7.4. Release 12.2 - Oracle Electronic Kanban
Oracle Electronic Kanban (E-Kanban) provides a complete solution for kanban
management enabling complex kanban planning, setup, execution, and kanban related
analytics and notifications. Built using Oracle’s latest technology for user interfaces,
Oracle Application Development Framework, the comprehensive, user friendly and
configurable E-Kanban workstation provides you with both an overall view of kanban
cards and pull sequence details as well as allowing you to perform transactions within a
single user interface.
Integrated with Oracle E-Business Suite’s planning products, E-Kanban provides the
ability to simulate, plan and replan your kanban pull sequences allowing you to optimize
both your production and inventory management. Production, supplier, inter-organization
and intra-organization kanbans are all supported.
Oracle E-Kanban provides you with:
• Configurable and user friendly graphical user interfaces
• Extensive search capabilities
• The ability to view kanban cards, pull sequences, and carry out transactions
within a single user interface
• The ability to scan and transact kanban cards
• The ability to simulate, plan and replan kanban pull sequences from a single
user interface
• Configurable alerts and notifications
• Configurable analytics dashboard
• The ability to customize the solution using the provided.
7.7.4.1. Configurable and User-Friendly Graphical User Interface

Built using Oracle’s latest technology for user interfaces, Oracle Application
Development Framework, the comprehensive, user friendly, and configurable E-Kanban
workstation provides you with both an overall view of kanban cards and pull sequence
details as well as allowing you to perform transactions such as card replenishment,
receipt and card status changes within a single user interface. Using the kanban card
summary view, you are able to gain instant insight into the supply status of every kanban
card associated with each pull sequence in a single glance. Kanban card history can also
be viewed.
Entire pull sequence chains can be viewed graphically, providing full visibility into your
supply chain.
7.7.4.2. Enhanced Planning Capabilities

both your production and inventory management.
E-Kanban allows you to:
• Plan for selected pull sequences
• Override the demand value calculated by the system with a user entered value
• Update production for a future date with future dated cards
• Add temporary cards when updating production
• View the horizontal plan for a pull sequence which depicts the day-wise view of
the planning calculations for a pull sequence over the selected time range. The
planning data depicted shows the beginning on hand inventory, daily demands,
number of cards on hand and replenished, closing on hand inventory, safety
stocks etc
Both the planned pull sequences and the horizontal plan for a pull sequence are displayed
within a single user interface, allowing you to quickly and easily see the effects of your
simulation changes.
You can search for pull sequences by either an entire kanban plan or item. When
selecting pull sequences by kanban plan, data from planning is used to calculate the size
or number of kanban cards. You can view, and adjust the output of the kanban planning if
you wish, to see the effects on both your pull sequence and its related horizontal plan.
When specific pull sequences are queried by item outside of a kanban plan, the system
uses the demand that has been entered directly into the pull sequence to calculate the
kanban size or number of kanban cards. You can view and adjust the demand to see the
effects on both your pull sequence and its related horizontal plan.
When you are happy with either the recommendations from planning, or the results of
your demand simulation, you can update production to generate the new number of
kanban cards or adjust the kanban size either for a single pull sequence, or for every pull
sequence listed in the pull sequence planning table.
When you update production

• If the system recommends a decrease in the number of kanban cards, the
extra cards are cancelled when the cards are replenished.
• If the system recommends an increase in the number of cards, the additional
cards are generated automatically through a concurrent request.
• If there is a recommended change in the size of the kanban, the current
kanban cards are replaced with new cards at the time of replenishment. New
cards are added without cancelling the existing cards.
7.7.4.3. Logical Kanban Support

E-Kanban supports the logical replenishment of kanban cards. Logical kanbans are
replenished automatically via the scheduled concurrent program without any user
intervention.
7.7.4.4. Extensive Search Capabilities

Providing you with an efficient way of locating kanban cards and pull sequences, search
criteria can now be saved and reused. You can search for your kanban cards by item,
kanban card number, destination subinventory, destination locator, document number,
source locator, source organization, source subinventory, supplier, supplier site, buyer
name, inventory health, source type, and planner code.
Pull sequences can be searched by item, buyer name, line code, locator, planner code, site,
source locator, source organization, source subinventory, source type, subinventory and
supplier.
7.7.4.5. Configurable Supply Statuses for Kanban Cards

Depending upon your business need, you may prefer to use your own custom supply
statuses for your kanban cards. E-Kanban allows you to configure additional supply
statuses if required which are mapped to the seeded statuses.
7.7.4.6. Enhanced Supplier Kanbans

E-Kanban supports an item being sourced from multiple suppliers. When you are defining
the pull sequence, you have the ability to define multiple suppliers with an appropriate
sourcing percentage. The system then generates the required number of cards for each
supplier so that the sourcing percentage is maintained. Each kanban card generated is
associated with a single supplier.
E-Kanban also supports the ability to update the supplier name in a kanban card if the card
is in either the “New” or “Full” status. If the user updates the supplier name in the kanban
card, the system will try to maintain the sourcing percentage as close as possible to the
values setup in the pull sequence.
7.7.4.7. Replenishment Order Consolidation

Replenishment order consolidation is the ability to generate a single document in order to
replenish multiple cards that belong to the same pull sequence. If multiple cards from the
same pull sequence are replenished, and are sourced from the same source, the system can
optionally consolidate the replenishment requirements into a single document, for example
a Purchase Order or an Internal Sales Order. Consolidation is supported for supplier, inter-
organization & intra-organization kanbans.
7.7.4.8. Temporary Kanban Cards

Temporary kanban cards can be created to handle demand fluctuations. A temporary
kanban card can have a maximum replenishment cycle number entered or a disable date.
Once the kanban card attains the disable date or maximum cycle number, the card will be
cancelled on the next replenishment. If the card is in the replenishment process, it will not
be cancelled until it is next replenished.
7.7.4.9. Notifications and Alerts

E-Kanban has configurable notifications based on the following business events.
• Pull sequence creation
• Pull sequence update
• Kanban card creation
• Kanban supply status change
• Kanban cards status change
You can configure notifications based on any or all of these businesses events. The
application displays new notifications, and notifications that have been read, separately.
You can also acknowledge new notifications.
7.7.4.10. Configurable Analytics Dashboard

The following analytics are able to be configured and displayed on the E-Kanban
Dashboard:
• Inventory health – compares the inventory levels to safety stock and categorizes
the outcome as Good, Bad and Warning.
• Unmoved cards in each status – shows the number of cards of each supply type
that have been in a specific status for more than the defined length of time.
• Actual lead time versus planned lead time – compares the actual lead time of
replenished cards for each pull sequence with the lead time entered for the pull
sequence in the planning region of the setup tab.
• Actual demand versus planned demand– compares the actual demand for each
pull sequence with the average daily demand as used in the last planning run.
Custom panels are also able to be added to the dashboard by including a reference to their
URL in the Custom Panels setup parameter.
7.7.4.11. Configurable Production Kanban Job Status

Production kanban replenishment creates discrete or lot-based jobs. You can configure of
these jobs to be created in a “Released”, “Unreleased” or “Hold” status.
7.7.4.12. Configurable “Full” Status Tolerance
When you are receiving an order or completed job quantity against a kanban, you may
have received nearly, but not quite, all of the quantity required for that kanban, yet you
may want this kanban card to be considered full. E-Kanban allows you to enter a
predefined percentage for each kanban type that must be met in order for the kanban to be
placed in “Full” status again.
7.7.4.13. Import and Export Capabilities

Pull sequences and Kanban Cards can be imported to E-Kanban through the
provided API. Table data can also be exported in MS Excel format by clicking the
export button available for each table on the Summary and Planning tabs.
7.7.4.14. Access and Security

Access to the pages within E-Kanban can be configured by user responsibility.
The user can create responsibilities and restrict access to pages / form functions
for these responsibilities.
7.7.4.15. Integration with iSupplier portal

E-Kanban is integrated with iSupplier portal. Within iSupplier Portal, the supplier can
view and change the status of their relevant kanban cards on the E-Kanban tab to any
custom status mapped to the seeded ‘In Process’ status.
7.7.4.16. Customizable Using the Provided

By configuring the client for custom business rules provided with E-Kanban, you can
customize the solution to meet the requirements of your operations. The provided allow
you to:
• Define custom naming for kanban cards. For example, you can define an
alphanumeric prefix for kanban card numbers.
• Define valid custom status transitions through custom logic.
• Define logic for assigning suppliers to kanban cards for pull sequences with
multiple suppliers.
• Define custom logic to run while cancelling a kanban card. For example, you
can cancel the associated documents while cancelling the kanban card.
• Define a custom formula for calculating the number or size of kanban cards.
(This client extension has been enhanced.)
• Define custom logic to run when a supplier or inter-org kanban card is
received. For example, you can cancel the backordered quantity while
shipping.
• Define custom logic to run when an intra-org or inter-org kanban card is
transferred. For example, you can configure when a card is considered to be
in “Full” status for a particular item rather than just per card type.
• Define the custom threshold for bad and good inventory health at levels more
granular than the organization level.
• Define custom logic for determining whether a card is considered unmoved.
7.7.4.17. Terminology
Term Definition
E-Kanban Electronic Kanban Application
Term Definition
ERP Enterprise Resource Planning

Replenish Request for material
URL Uniform Resource Locator
7.7.5. Release 12.2.2
7.7.5.1. Enhanced Serialized Manufacturing

To improve product traceability and genealogy, many production environments require
that an assembly serial number be identified and associated with the product at either the
start of production, or at a specific step within the production process. And MES for
Discrete Manufacturing supports this functionality. There are specific capabilities added
to significantly improve the Serialized Manufacturing execution in this release which
include,
• Improved scanner friendly user interface to perform express material issue and
return transactions for both serialized and non-serialized components, including
ability to provide component serial attributes for specific assembly serial number.
• Ability to easily identify required, issued and open component quantities during
material transaction in the context of specific assembly serial number.
• User friendly warning and error messages in the context of specific assembly
serial number during material transactions.
• A clear 360 degree detail view user interface for each assembly serial number
listing required, issued and open components, ability to quickly filter and review
component issues, component serial numbers and component serial attributes,
move transactions and quality plan results etc
7.7.5.2. MES Operator Workstation Enhancements

The MES operator user interfaces are enhanced to display the Clock-In Context
Information and provide control over Operator simultaneous Clock-In.
7.7.5.3. MES UI Configurability Enhancements

The following enhancements are implemented around MES configurability,
• Ability to configure Custom UI Actions from the global action dropdown list
• Ability to control Operator Simultaneous Clock-In
• Ability to enter ‘Incomplete’ as the Requisition Status when creating OSP
Purchase Requisition
7.7.5.4. MES Custom Extension User Exits / Hooks

The following user exits/custom hook points are added.
• Custom user exit/hook for managing next operation step defaulting during both
standard and express move
• Custom user exit/hook for managing component lot selection during express
move
• Custom user exit/hook for managing express complete during express move
7.7.6. Release 12.2.4
7.7.6.1. Mass Return Components of Serialized Assembly (Dekitting)
To improve productivity when disassembling an assembly serial and returning

components to stores, a new mass action has been added
• New Mass Return component in Global Actions Menu

• Initiates returns of all component serials, lots used in manufacture of an assembly
serial back into inventory. There is support for both cases, when assembly serial
belongs to open and closed work orders.
7.7.6.2. 1.3Serialization APIs

Assembly move, completion & component material transactions are now possible for
serialized assemblies through the standard open interfaces. Earlier these transactions were
possible only through the transaction user interfaces for serialized assembly work orders.
7.7.7. Release 12.2.5
7.7.7.1. User Friendly Page to Clock In & Out

Existing ‘Clock Out Multiple Jobs’ page is enhanced to provide a central place from
where user can clock in, clock out, undo clock in on discrete job operations. This page is
entered from Global Actions menu.
7.7.7.2. Resource Level Clock In/Out

Further improving upon time reporting capabilities, operator work can now be captured
at resource level of granularity, down from operation level. Ability to clock in and out
of a resource is available from multiple screens including Dispatch list, Work Content
and Search Serial pages.
7.7.7.3. Tablet Optimized Supervisor Screens: Exceptions & Work Orders

With Tablet Optimized MES screens, discrete manufacturing MES Supervisors can
monitor work in process and take quick actions on the go, as they move about the shop
floor.
• View Work Order and Operation details. View work instruction attachments.
• Perform quick actions such as expedite, hold, release, unrelease, cancel and add
notes
• View component & resource requirements and monitor currently open quantities.
• Manage production exceptions related to assembly, components, resources and
quality
• Collaborate in transaction context using device features such as email, phone and
text
7.7.7.4. Component Availability Management

Component Availability Management feature helps a production scheduler to take stock
of open component requirements of work orders (unreleased, released & on hold) at a
point of time by having the system order the jobs in a specified priority sequence and
then allocating components to the jobs starting with the top most priority one, using on-
hand balances of the components. The jobs are marked as either having all components
available or having component shortages.
Production scheduler can also try to force allocate a job that does not have all
components allocated by letting the system determine the work orders that would need
to be swapped out or de-allocated.
The production scheduler can also take actions such as releasing unreleased work orders
that have all components available or put released work orders on hold that do not have
all components available.
The above feature lets production scheduler react to unplanned situations and carry out
day zero adjustments to plans suggested by planning modules.
7.7.8. Release 12.2.6
7.7.8.1. Auto Associate Serial Numbers

With Auto Associate Serial Numbers feature, users will be able to auto generate &
associate serial numbers to the assembly at the time of releasing the serialized job.
7.7.8.2. Assembly Serial Number Clock in/out

Further improving upon time reporting capabilities, operator work can now be captured
at Assembly serial level, down from operation level. Additionally assembly serial level
time capture can also be imported through open interfaces.
7.7.9. Release 12.2.7
7.7.9.1. Express Complete for Job Operations

Shop floor operators are provided with an ability to quickly mark all the related
operations for a given job operation and express complete all the related operations.
7.7.9.2. Improved User Interface to Review and Approve Operator Times

Supervisors are provided with an ability to query all non-submitted time transactions
across Job Operations, Department, Resource, Instance, Date Range, Employees,
review, edit the entries and save/submit them for costing purposes.
7.7.9.3. Improved Work Order Search and Exception Search

Work Order and Exceptions pages are enhanced by allowing wild card search on the
work order field and by providing additional search attributes in the search and filter
panels.
7.7.9.4. Support to Update Descriptive Flex Fields in Work Order Details Page
Work order details page is enhanced to allow the update of the component descriptive
flex field and operation descriptive flex fields.
7.7.9.5. Provision to Assign Shop Floor Status

Supervisors can assign shop floor status to the job operation which doesn’t allow move
transaction. Move transaction can be resumed by choosing a different status that allows
move transaction or delete the status assignment.
7.7.9.6. Support to Multiple Clock Out of Job Operations
Operators are allowed to have multiple clock out of job operations.
7.7.9.7. Provision to Auto Associate Serial Number

Supervisors can auto generate and associate serial numbers to the assembly at the time
of releasing serialized job.
7.7.10. Release 12.2.8
7.7.10.1. Ability to enable eKanban at Organization Level

Users can enable the eKanban functionality at an organization level by setting the
organization parameter, eKanban enabled.
7.7.10.2. Ability to receive Kanban in common sub inventory

Supplier Kanban can be received into a common sub-inventory instead of the Kanban
Point of Use location without affecting any supply status changes.
7.7.10.3. View/Update DFF attributes for Pull Sequences and Kanban Cards
Users can view and update DFF attributes from the eKanban user interface for Pull
Sequences and Kanban Cards.
7.7.10.4. Internal Organization centric view for Kanban cards

Users can view Inter org Kanban cards that are sourced to the current organization and
transfer them to the owning organization.
7.7.10.5. Publish Kanban APIs and Interfaces

eKanban Public APIs are available in Integration repository (Integrated SOA Gateway
responsibility) for users to consume.
7.7.10.6. Show Blanket Purchase release for Supplier Kanban

eKanban Summary screen will include the release number information for the blanket
agreements.
7.7.10.7. Specifying Component revision during backflush transactions

Users can specify component revision during backflush when performing Move, Move
& Complete, completion transactions for WIP jobs and flow schedules.
7.7.10.8. Validate material issue of push components at WIP completion

Users can validate whether push components are already issued while performing WIP
completion transaction for discrete jobs and serial numbers.
7.7.10.9. View bar code and reported time of a work order

Users have the ability to view the barcode for work order numbers and serial numbers in
the View Work Content screen.
7.7.11. Release 12.2.9
7.7.11.1. View Onhand Quantity across subinventories during Material Issue

Transactions
Users can view the onhand quantity across subinventories while performing the material
issue transactions for the components in the MES Transact Components page.
7.7.11.2. Ability to recompute the required quantity based on Assembly Over

Completions/Scrap
System would recompute or retain the required quantity of the components when
performing assembly overcompletions and scrap transactions using the WIP parameter.
7.7.11.3. Restrict Move Transactions based on the Department Access

Users can perform the move transactions in MES pages confined to the departments that
the user is having access using MES parameter “Departmental Access”.
7.7.11.4. View Sales Order demand information for Completed Work orders
Users can track the sales order demand information in the MES View Job Details page
for work orders post completion and sales orders fulfilment.
7.7.12. Release 12.2.11
7.7.12.1. Fully distribute exploded demand of the components to the pull

sequences during eKanban Planning run
eKanban planning is enhanced to consider the exploded demand of the components
during the planning run and fully distribute the demand to all the pull sequences of the
components. This is applicable when the BOM component is defined with or without
supply subinventory to help improved Kanban system design.
7.7.12.2. View history of clock-in / clock-out at employee / department level

MES supervisor can view the history of clock-in / clock-out of employees by
department. Also, MES operator can view history of clock-in and clock-out details.
7.7.12.3. View Work Order details and re-schedule Work Orders

MES supervisor can view work order details and re-schedule the work orders based on
requirement.
7.7.13. Release 12.2.12
7.7.13.1. View Shift In and Shift Out Details of Operators

Supervisor can view the history of Shift In and Shift Out of shop floor operators.
7.7.13.2. Assign Resource Instances for Discrete Jobs

Supervisor and operators can assign resource instances of machine and person type
resources to discrete jobs and serialized jobs.
7.7.13.3. eKanban - Configure Beginning Onhand in the Horizontal Plan
Beginning Onhand can be configured using custom extension and users can view
Beginnning Onhand in the Horizontal Plan in Planning Workbench.
7.7.14. Release 12.2.13
7.7.14.1. Ability to reserve component items for work orders

Supervisors can manually reserve items for work orders by invoking material
reservations action for a job operation from the Work Content / Dispatch list.
7.7.14.2. Navigate to operation details page from dispatch list

Supervisors / operators can navigate to “Operation Details” page directly from Work
Content / Dispatch list.
7.7.14.3. Update Operation Progress % for job operation

Supervisors / operators can update the operation progress% for job operation manually in
the “Operation Details” page.
7.7.14.4. Print Job Traveler for multiple jobs

Supervisors can view and print job traveler for multiple jobs from the Work Orders page.
7.7.15. Terminology
Term Definition
Serialized Job A serialized job is a discrete job that has pre-defined and
associated assembly serial numbers. After the serialization
start operation, the progress on the shop floor is tracked using
the assembly serial number.
Genealogy Genealogy is the ability to provide complete history of a
finished product or a sub assembly by identifying the
lot/serial number of the assembly as well as the components
and their quantities, lot/serial numbers etc. This is a
requirement for industries/manufacturers that have to meet
traceability needs.
Job Traveler Job Traveler or shop packet is a set of documents associated
with a work order that travels with the assemblies as it moves
through the routing in the shop floor. It usually consists of
setup and work instructions, list of components and required
quantities, bar code labels, operation details and any other
relevant information that will aid the completion of the work
order. In some cases, it may also include spaces for
operators/inspectors to place their initials after
inspection/verification steps.
7.8. Oracle Electronic Kanban
7.8.1. Overview
Oracle Electronic Kanban (E-Kanban) provides a complete solution for kanban
management enabling complex kanban planning, setup, execution, and kanban related
analytics and notifications. Built using Oracle’s latest technology for user interfaces,
Oracle Application Development Framework, the comprehensive, user friendly and
configurable E-Kanban workstation provides you with both an overall view of kanban
cards and pull sequence details as well as allowing you to perform transactions within a
single user interface.
both your production and inventory management. Production, supplier, inter-organization
and intra-organization kanbans are all supported.
Oracle E-Kanban provides you with:
• Configurable and user friendly graphical user interfaces
• Extensive search capabilities
• The ability to view kanban cards, pull sequences, and carry out transactions
within a single user interface
• The ability to scan and transact kanban cards
• The ability to simulate, plan and replan kanban pull sequences from a single
user interface
• Configurable alerts and notifications
• Configurable analytics dashboard
• The ability to customize the solution using the provided.
7.8.2. Release 12.2
7.8.2.1. Configurable and User-Friendly Graphical User Interface

Built using Oracle’s latest technology for user interfaces, Oracle Application
Development Framework, the comprehensive, user friendly, and configurable E-Kanban
workstation provides you with both an overall view of kanban cards and pull sequence
details as well as allowing you to perform transactions such as card replenishment,
receipt and card status changes within a single user interface. Using the kanban card
summary view, you are able to gain instant insight into the supply status of every kanban
card associated with each pull sequence in a single glance. Kanban card history can also
be viewed.
Entire pull sequence chains can be viewed graphically, providing full visibility into your
supply chain.
7.8.2.2. Enhanced Planning Capabilities

both your production and inventory management.
E-Kanban allows you to:
• Plan for selected pull sequences
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Electronic Kanban 83
• Override the demand value calculated by the system with a user entered value
• Update production for a future date with future dated cards
• Add temporary cards when updating production
• View the horizontal plan for a pull sequence which depicts the day-wise view of
the planning calculations for a pull sequence over the selected time range. The
planning data depicted shows the beginning on hand inventory, daily demands,
number of cards on hand and replenished, closing on hand inventory, safety
stocks etc
Both the planned pull sequences and the horizontal plan for a pull sequence are displayed
within a single user interface, allowing you to quickly and easily see the effects of your
simulation changes.
You can search for pull sequences by either an entire kanban plan or item. When
selecting pull sequences by kanban plan, data from planning is used to calculate the size
or number of kanban cards. You can view, and adjust the output of the kanban planning if
you wish, to see the effects on both your pull sequence and its related horizontal plan.
When specific pull sequences are queried by item outside of a kanban plan, the system
uses the demand that has been entered directly into the pull sequence to calculate the
kanban size or number of kanban cards. You can view and adjust the demand to see the
effects on both your pull sequence and its related horizontal plan.
When you are happy with either the recommendations from planning, or the results of
your demand simulation, you can update production to generate the new number of
kanban cards or adjust the kanban size either for a single pull sequence, or for every pull
sequence listed in the pull sequence planning table.
When you update production

• If the system recommends a decrease in the number of kanban cards, the
extra cards are cancelled when the cards are replenished.
• If the system recommends an increase in the number of cards, the additional
cards are generated automatically through a concurrent request.
• If there is a recommended change in the size of the kanban, the current
kanban cards are replaced with new cards at the time of replenishment. New
cards are added without cancelling the existing cards.
7.8.2.3. Logical Kanban Support

E-Kanban supports the logical replenishment of kanban cards. Logical kanbans are
replenished automatically via the scheduled concurrent program without any user
intervention.
7.8.2.4. Extensive Search Capabilities

Providing you with an efficient way of locating kanban cards and pull sequences, search
criteria can now be saved and reused. You can search for your kanban cards by item,
kanban card number, destination subinventory, destination locator, document number,
source locator, source organization, source subinventory, supplier, supplier site, buyer
name, inventory health, source type, and planner code.
Pull sequences can be searched by item, buyer name, line code, locator, planner code, site,
source locator, source organization, source subinventory, source type, subinventory and
supplier.
7.8.2.5. Configurable Supply Statuses for Kanban Cards
Depending upon your business need, you may prefer to use your own custom supply
statuses for your kanban cards. E-Kanban allows you to configure additional supply
statuses if required which are mapped to the seeded statuses.
7.8.2.6. Enhanced Supplier Kanbans

E-Kanban supports an item being sourced from multiple suppliers. When you are defining
the pull sequence, you have the ability to define multiple suppliers with an appropriate
sourcing percentage. The system then generates the required number of cards for each
supplier so that the sourcing percentage is maintained. Each kanban card generated is
associated with a single supplier.
E-Kanban also supports the ability to update the supplier name in a kanban card if the card
is in either the “New” or “Full” status. If the user updates the supplier name in the kanban
card, the system will try to maintain the sourcing percentage as close as possible to the
values setup in the pull sequence.
7.8.2.7. Replenishment Order Consolidation

Replenishment order consolidation is the ability to generate a single document in order to
replenish multiple cards that belong to the same pull sequence. If multiple cards from the
same pull sequence are replenished, and are sourced from the same source, the system can
optionally consolidate the replenishment requirements into a single document, for example
a Purchase Order or an Internal Sales Order. Consolidation is supported for supplier, inter-
organization & intra-organization kanbans.
7.8.2.8. Temporary Kanban Cards

Temporary kanban cards can be created to handle demand fluctuations. A temporary
kanban card can have a maximum replenishment cycle number entered or a disable date.
Once the kanban card attains the disable date or maximum cycle number, the card will be
cancelled on the next replenishment. If the card is in the replenishment process, it will not
be cancelled until it is next replenished.
7.8.2.9. Notifications and Alerts

E-Kanban has configurable notifications based on the following business events.
• Pull sequence creation
• Pull sequence update
• Kanban card creation
• Kanban supply status change
• Kanban cards status change
You can configure notifications based on any or all of these businesses events. The
application displays new notifications, and notifications that have been read, separately.
You can also acknowledge new notifications.
7.8.2.10. Configurable Analytics Dashboard

The following analytics are able to be configured and displayed on the E-Kanban
Dashboard:
• Inventory health – compares the inventory levels to safety stock and categorizes
the outcome as Good, Bad and Warning.
• Unmoved cards in each status – shows the number of cards of each supply type
that have been in a specific status for more than the defined length of time.
•Actual lead time versus planned lead time – compares the actual lead time of
replenished cards for each pull sequence with the lead time entered for the pull
sequence in the planning region of the setup tab.
• Actual demand versus planned demand– compares the actual demand for each
pull sequence with the average daily demand as used in the last planning run.
Custom panels are also able to be added to the dashboard by including a reference to their
URL in the Custom Panels setup parameter.
7.8.2.11. Configurable Production Kanban Job Status

Production kanban replenishment creates discrete or lot-based jobs. You can configure of
these jobs to be created in a “Released”, “Unreleased” or “Hold” status.
7.8.2.12. Configurable “Full” Status Tolerance

When you are receiving an order or completed job quantity against a kanban, you may
have received nearly, but not quite, all of the quantity required for that kanban, yet you
may want this kanban card to be considered full. E-Kanban allows you to enter a
predefined percentage for each kanban type that must be met in order for the kanban to be
placed in “Full” status again.
7.8.2.13. Import and Export Capabilities

Pull sequences and Kanban Cards can be imported to E-Kanban through the
provided API. Table data can also be exported in MS Excel format by clicking the
export button available for each table on the Summary and Planning tabs.
7.8.2.14. Access and Security

Access to the pages within E-Kanban can be configured by user responsibility.
The user can create responsibilities and restrict access to pages / form functions
for these responsibilities.
7.8.2.15. Integration with iSupplier portal

E-Kanban is integrated with iSupplier portal. Within iSupplier Portal, the supplier can
view and change the status of their relevant kanban cards on the E-Kanban tab to any
custom status mapped to the seeded ‘In Process’ status.
7.8.2.16. Customizable Using the Provided

By configuring the client for custom business rules provided with E-Kanban, you can
customize the solution to meet the requirements of your operations. The provided allow
you to:
• Define custom naming for kanban cards. For example, you can define an
alphanumeric prefix for kanban card numbers.
• Define valid custom status transitions through custom logic.
• Define logic for assigning suppliers to kanban cards for pull sequences with
multiple suppliers.
• Define custom logic to run while cancelling a kanban card. For example, you
can cancel the associated documents while cancelling the kanban card.
• Define a custom formula for calculating the number or size of kanban cards.
(This client extension has been enhanced.)
• Define custom logic to run when a supplier or inter-org kanban card is
received. For example, you can cancel the backordered quantity while
shipping.
• Define custom logic to run when an intra-org or inter-org kanban card is
transferred. For example, you can configure when a card is considered to be
in “Full” status for a particular item rather than just per card type.
• Define the custom threshold for bad and good inventory health at levels more
granular than the organization level.
• Define custom logic for determining whether a card is considered unmoved.
7.8.3. Release 12.2.8
7.8.3.1. Ability to enable eKanban at Organization Level

Users can enable the eKanban functionality at an organization level by setting the
organization parameter, eKanban enabled.
7.8.3.2. Ability to receive Kanban in common sub inventory

Supplier Kanban can be received into a common sub-inventory instead of the Kanban
Point of Use location without affecting any supply status changes.
7.8.3.3. View/Update DFF attributes for Pull Sequences and Kanban Cards
Users can view and update DFF attributes from the eKanban user interface for Pull
Sequences and Kanban Cards.
7.8.3.4. Internal Organization centric view for Kanban cards

Users can view Inter org Kanban cards that are sourced to the current organization and
transfer them to the owning organization.
7.8.3.5. Publish Kanban APIs and Interfaces

eKanban Public APIs are available in Integration repository (Integrated SOA Gateway
responsibility) for users to consume.
7.8.3.6. Show Blanket Purchase release for Supplier Kanban

eKanban Summary screen will include the release number information for the blanket
agreements.
7.8.4. Release 12.2.11
7.8.4.1. Fully distribute exploded demand of the components to the pull

sequences during eKanban Planning run
eKanban planning is enhanced to consider the exploded demand of the components
during the planning run and fully distribute the demand to all the pull sequences of the
components. This is applicable when the BOM component is defined with or without
supply subinventory to help improved Kanban system design.
7.8.5. Release 12.2.12
7.8.5.1. eKanban - Configure Beginning Onhand in the Horizontal Plan

Beginning Onhand can be configured using custom extension and users can view
Beginnning Onhand in the Horizontal Plan in Planning Workbench.
7.8.6. Release 12.2.13
7.8.6.1. Oracle Electronic Kanban in new OA pages and ECC dashboard

Oracle Electronic Kanban user interfaces are made available with Oracle Applications
Framework to provide better application configuration and modern user experience. This
eliminates the dependency of weblogic server and consistent with other OA pages. All
the functionalities and features are available in the new OA pages and dashboard
capabilities are provided with Enterprise Command Center Framework.
Oracle Electronic Kanban in new OA framework has the following pages:
• Dashboard – It provides a graphical view of kanban cards and pull sequences.
kanban planners can get insights into Inventory Health, Replenishment Lead
Time, Kanban Demand and Unmoved Cards. The information is presented
through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable kanban planners
navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific pull sequence or
kanban card, and take an action to resolve the exceptions.
• Cards Summary – This page allows user to search and view kanban cards for
specific items and perform transactions.
• Cards Action – This page allows user to replenish, receive, transfer, or change
status of Kanban cards.
• Kanban Planning – It helps to determine the optimal number of kanban card, and
calculating the kanban size. User can launch plan results, edit, recalculate, and
replan. User can also view and edit the horizontal plans.
• Kanban Setup – This page allows user to query, view, update, create, and delete
pull sequences and kanban cards.
• Configurations – It allows user to configure parameters at either the site or
organization level. It provides configuration parameters for demand and lead
time calculations, tolerance for dashboard calculations, inventory health
thresholds, and a number of other default values for kanban transactions.
7.8.7. Terminology
Term Definition
Electronic Kanban Electronic Kanban Application

ERP Enterprise Resource Planning
Replenish Request for material
ECC Enterprise Command Center
OA Oracle Applications Framework
7.9. Oracle Shop Floor Management (OSFM)
7.9.1. Release 12.1.1
7.9.1.1. Refresh BOM/Routing of Lot Based Jobs

Refresh BOM/Routing of Open Lot Based Jobs functionality is meant to propagate the
changes made to bills of material and routing of an assembly to the jobs that were created
for the assembly prior to the changes.
In release 12.1.1 this feature has been enhanced to enable jobs to get the new (or
changed) details of the BOM/Routing that are refreshed based on the routing revision
date or a revision date as specified by the user.
New parameters have been added to Refresh BOM/Routing of Open Lot Based Jobs
concurrent request, so that the user can refresh all selected jobs either as per Job Revision
Date or New Revision Date.
7.9.1.2. Lot Creation Using Substitute Components

In many manufacturing scenarios there is always a need to use alternate or substitute item
due to non-availability of the actual item (raw material) to create and process a job. There
other factors could be shortages, yield etc.
From this release, during Lot Creation in OSFM, users can create a lot from a substitute
component as defined in the BOM. If Item A is a lot controlled end item, Item B is the
component for Item A, and Item C is a substitute for Item B, then in the lot creation form,
it is possible to enter an inventory Lot number for Item C and create a Lot Based Job for
Item A.
7.9.1.3. Lot Uniqueness/Reuse of Lot Name

OSFM solution allows creation of jobs with the same name. At times, this causes
inconsistency during completion and appending the sector extension and proceeding with
further operations in the subsequent sector.
To control this, a new parameter has been introduced to either allow or disallow users
from creating lots with the same name as in the earlier/same sector.
As this functionality can vary for different business scenarios, users can set their
preferences accordingly. Customers migrating to Release 12.1.1 from prior releases can
continue using the existing functionality by setting the parameter as per their business
needs.
7.9.1.4. Network Routing – Lead Time Calculation

From release 12.1.1, the two options in the Tools Menu, i.e., Compute Lead Times and
Rollup Lead Times are available by default in the Network Routings when the user
chooses the seeded ‘Shop Floor Manager’ responsibility.
Compute Lead-time option is used to calculate manufacturing lead times for the selected
item in the Network Routings form. The calculation updates the lead-time attributes of
this manufacturing item, regardless of whether you manually maintain this item's lead
times. Changes to routing and resource usages can impact an item's lead times. After each
change made to a routing (adjusting usages, adding operations, and so on), the
manufacturing lead-time is recalculated for the item.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Shop Floor Management (OSFM) 89
Lead-time for items with network routings is calculated using only resources on the
primary path. Manufacturing Lead Times for the same item (and more items) can also be
calculated by using the concurrent request.
Rollup Lead-time is used to roll up the cumulative lead times after each change made to a
bill (adding components, assigning to a different operation, and so on) or the item lead
times. Changes to the indented bill of material and component lead times can impact a
parent item's cumulative lead times.
Also the concurrent request can be used to rollup the cumulative Lead-times for the same
item (and more items).
7.9.1.5. Lot Based Job Interface Enhancements

Lot Based Job Interface has been enhanced to support the following features:
• Add operation: You can add new standard or non-standard operation as future
operation to the job.
• Delete operation: You can delete future operations on the job that are not on the
primary routing path. If you want to delete an operation in the primary path, then
delete the network links to the operation and then delete the operation. This also
deletes resources, resource instances and components from plan details.
• Add operation link: You can add new network link between two operations in the
job details. However, you have to exercise caution that the network formed by
such an action is valid.
• Delete operation link: You can delete the existing network link between two
operations in the job details. However, you have to exercise caution that the
network formed by such an action is valid.
• Add resources: You can add new resources to both current and future operations.
• Delete resources: You can delete resources from both current and future
operations.
• Add components: You can add new components to both current and future
operations.
• Delete components: You can delete components from both current and future
operations.
7.10. Oracle Supply Chain Globalization

7.10.1. Release 12.1.1
7.10.1.1. Buy/Sell Subcontracting

Buy/Sell Subcontracting is a business practice where an Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) outsources the complete manufacturing of an assembly to a
Manufacturing Partner (MP) and sells the components (used to build the assembly) to the
MP. The timing of sale is usually when the OEM ships the components to the MP. A
company can implement Buy/Sell Subcontracting when it has the following business
needs;
• Ownership of Subcontracting Components
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Supply Chain Globalization 90
When the subcontracting components are sold, the ownership is transferred from
an OEM to the MP. MP is fully responsible for the component inventory,
damage, etc.
• Receivables and Payables
Cash receipts from the sale of subcontracting components and payment for
purchase of assemblies are treated as independent business transactions.
Therefore, Receivables and Payables are usually not netted – OEM pays the MP
for purchasing the outsourced assembly and the MP pays for buying the
subcontracting components from the OEM.
Buy/Sell Subcontracting functionality is supported from this release with the following
features;
• Planning at OEM and MP
Planning considers the OSA (outsourced assembly) requirements in OEM and
appropriately plans for the constituent components required at MP.
• Goods Movement between OEM and MP
Creation of Subcontracting Purchase order triggers automatic creation of the
requisite sales and purchase orders to enable the movement of components from
OEM to MP. Also, the discrete jobs required to assemble the OSA at MP are
automatically created. Both synchronized shipment and prepositioned material
movements are supported.
• Inventory Tracking and Visibility at MP
Through online visibility into the component stocks available at the MP, the
OEM can effectively plan for the components that need to be shipped to the MP.
Further any unforeseen consumptions can be manually reconciled using a
workbench.
Buy/Sell Subcontracting functionality helps you to easily track and manage your
Note: Buy/Sell Subcontracting feature is supported for all countries and costing methods
(Standard, Average, FIFO & LIFO).
7.10.2. Terminology
Term Definition
Prepositioned Components Components are shipped to the MP without reference to any

subcontracting order ahead of assembly requirements. When
the subcontracting order is created, these components are hard
allocated.
Synchronized Components Components are shipped to the MP with references to specific
subcontracting orders, along with the order.
7.10.3. Release 12.2.11
7.10.3.1. BREXIT and modified Intrastat Reporting

Modifications are done in Intrastat Reporting to support BREXIT regulations.
7.10.3.2. Exclude Expense and Service Items from Movement Statistics Report
You can now optionally exclude expense and service items from the Movement Statistics
report based on the new profile setting.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Supply Chain Globalization 91
7.10.3.3. API to reset Movement Statistics Records
You can now reset the existing movement statistics records using API to be able to run
the movement statistics processor program again and create new movement statistics
records.
7.10.4. Release 12.2.12
7.10.4.1. IR/ISO Returns Included in Movement Statistics

Movement Statistics report would now display the Internal Requisition/Internal Sales
Order related returns.
7.10.5. Release 12.2.13
7.10.5.1. Concurrent program wrapper for Movement Statistics Reset API

The existing concurrent program Movement Statistics Reset Status is re-purposed to
support resetting the previously created movement records and corresponding
parent transactions.
7.11. Oracle Project Manufacturing

7.11.1. Release 12.2.11
7.11.1.1. Enable Fast Transfer of Project Materials

The project transfer form used to perform transfer of project materials has been enhanced
to display a warning message only once when requiring a physical transfer of the item
between subinventories or locators as opposed to displaying the message for every project
material transfer transaction.
7.11.2. Release 12.2.13
7.11.2.1. Remove Payback Demand on Inactive Projects

Ability for users to remove payback demand on lending projects that are no longer active.
7.12. Oracle Project Manufacturing Command Center

7.12.1. Overview
The Oracle Project Manufacturing Command Center provides dashboards enabling
shopfloor supervisors, procurement, sales, project, and inventory managers to keep
projects on track and achieve better project supply chain and manufacturing execution
outcomes. Through an integrated solution, the command center ties projects with supply
and demand, tracks inventory and manufacturing execution, empowering managers to
gain insights into their operations, manage risk and prioritize on-time product delivery.
The Oracle Project Manufacturing Command Center feature is available at no additional
cost to licensed users of Oracle Discrete Manufacturing. It can be applied to Release
12.2.4 and above.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Project Manufacturing 92
7.12.2. Release 12.2.10+
Release 12.2 V6.
7.12.2.1. Overview Dashboard

The Overview dashboard allows project managers and shopfloor supervisors to quickly
identify project supply chain exceptions which require immediate attention, enabling
them to resolve schedule conflicts in a timely manner. The information is presented
through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable project managers and
shopfloor supervisors navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific
exception, take an action to resolve the exceptions and expedite the transaction.
7.12.2.2. Projects Dashboard

Project managers can use the Project Dashboard to monitor project and task activities,
analyze project manufacturing expenditures, and track status of supply commitments.
They can also gain insights into project costs, budget, revenue margin, and backlog. The
project managers navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific project,
task, or commitment to learn more details.
7.12.2.3. Work Orders Dashboard

The Work Order dashboard gives project managers and shopfloor supervisors visibility
into project work orders and operations, provides information related to production
schedules, unissued material requirements, and identify material shortages. The
shopfloor supervisors navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific
production work order, take an action to resolve the exceptions and expedite the work
order.
7.12.2.4. Procurement Dashboard

Procurement Dashboard is for project managers and procurement managers to track
status of the sourcing documents, requisitions, and purchase orders, manage supplier
delays, and take immediate actions on impacted manufacturing schedules. The
project and procurement managers navigate through the information quickly, drill into a
specific sourcing document, take action to resolve the exceptions and expedite the
material shipment delay.
7.12.2.5. Inventory Dashboard

The Inventory dashboard enables project mangers, shopfloor supervisors, and inventory
managers to manage project materials and inventory on-hand. The dashboard allows user
to analyze details of on-hand item quantity and value. Managers can proactively manage
project material transfer, borrow/payback actions to resolve material shortages and keep
projects schedule on track. The information is presented through clickable metrics, charts,
and results table to enable managers to navigate through the information quickly, narrow
down on the project material shortages, and allow them to resolve the issues in a timely
manner.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Project Manufacturing Command Center 93
7.12.2.6. Sales Order Dashboard
The Sales Order dashboard provides visibility into customer orders and allows project and
sales managers to perform sales analysis to reduce delays and overhead and ensure timely
delivery of products. The information is presented through clickable metrics, charts, and
results table to enable sales managers and shopfloor supervisors to navigate through the
information quickly, monitor and track status of product delivery.
7.12.3. Release 12.2.11

Release 12.2 V7
7.12.3.1. Schedule and Overdue exceptions in Work Order, Sales Orders and
Procurement dashboards
The following project manufacturing command center dashboards have been enhanced to
display the schedule and overdue exception metrics for each of the individual transaction
types
• Work Orders Dashboard
• Sales Orders Dashboard
• Procurement Dashboard
7.12.4. Release 12.2.11+
Release 12.2 V8
7.12.4.1. Track & Trace Dashboard

The Track & Trace dashboard provides product traceability and impact analysis
capabilities in a network diagram to visualize end-to-end project manufacturing execution
information comprising of purchase orders, purchase order distributions, project locators,
components, work orders, sales orders, sales order lines, project contracts and project
contract deliverables. The information is presented in a network diagram with clickable
nodes to enable project managers and production control personnel navigate through the
network quickly, trace the network forward and backward to track issues with project
related production work orders, resolve potential quality problems, trace items back to
suppliers and check project procurement status, increase inventory accuracy, track
customers to whom those production units were/are being shipped, and take actions on
putting work orders on hold, performing project material transfer, etc., understand the
broader impact to project and project contracts.
7.12.4.2. Navigate to Track & Trace dashboard from other project

manufacturing dashboards
Users can navigate to the Genealogy & Trace dashboard from the overview, work order,
sales order, and purchase order dashboards for a selected entity.
7.12.4.3. Navigate to discrete manufacturing Work Order Status dashboard from
Work Orders dashboard
Users can navigate to the discrete manufacturing Work Order Status dashboard from the
work order dashboard for a selected work order, project, or task.
7.12.4.4. Navigate to discrete manufacturing Work Order Status dashboard from

Overview dashboard
Users can navigate to the discrete manufacturing Work Order Status dashboard
from the work order region of dashboard for a selected work order, project, or
task.
7.12.5. Release 12.2.12
Release 12.2 V9
7.12.5.1. Display Timeline View in Dashboards

The dashboards overview, work orders, purchase orders, sales orders, and projects
enable users to view the records in the result table on a timeline basis using the
alternate visualization switch, Timeline Viewer.
7.12.5.2. View Timeline for Entity Nodes in Genealogy & Trace Dashboard
Users can navigate to the timeline view of each entity node in the network
diagram of Genealogy & Trace dashboard to view the transactions for the
respective enetity on a time basis. The timeline view is enabled in drawer mode of
visualization.
7.12.6. Release 12.2.12+

Release 12.2 V10.
7.12.6.1. Cost Activities dashboard

The Cost Activities dashboard enables project managers, cost managers, and financial
personnel to view summarized project manufacturing costs that facilitates reconciliation
with costs in Oracle Projects. The information is presented through clickable metrics,
charts, and results table to enable users to gain insights into project costs by cost source,
view aggregation of cost variances, and access transaction details.
7.12.6.2. Project Contracts dashboard

The Project Contracts dashboard provides project managers and contract managers the
ability to perform manufacturing related project contract analysis and ensure timely
delivery of products. The information is presented through clickable metrics, charts, and
results table to enable users to monitor and track status of contract deliverables with
seamless integration into Project Contract Workbench.
7.12.6.3. Navigate to the Receiving Dashboard from the Procurement dashboard

Users can navigate to the Receiving dashboard from the Procurement dashboard and the
purchase order or purchase order distribution node of the Genealogy and Trace
dashboard. The Receiving dashboard provides project managers information on project
purchase order items awaiting receipt or inspection.
7.12.6.4. Navigate to the Reservation Workbench from the Work Orders and
Sales Orders dashboards
Users can navigate to the Reservation Workbench from the Work Orders or Sales Orders
dashboards. From the work order and sales order nodes of the Genealogy and Trace
dashboard, users can also access the Reservation dashboard. The Reservation dashboard
shows existing demand and when a demand exists, a supply associated with the demand.
Project managers can find existing reservations that could fulfil the demand.
7.12.6.5. Navigate to the Shipping Operations HTML page from the Sales Order
or Project Contracts dashboards
Users can navigate to Shipping Operations HTML page from the Sales Orders or Project
Contracts dashboards to view shipping details associated with the shipment. From a sales
order line or contract deliverable node of the Genealogy and Trace dashboard, users can
also navigate to the Shipping Operations page. The Shipping Operations HTML page
provides users with the ability to view details of the shipment and perform actions on the
shipment such as pick and ship.
7.12.7. Release 12.2.13

Release 12.2 V11.
7.12.7.1. Color pinnig of chart in Cost Activities dashboard

The Total Amount by Cost Source chart in the Cost Activities dashboard is
enhanced with color pinning feature.
7.12.7.2. Visibility of work order dates in Work Order dashboard

The work order dashboard is enhanced to provide users better visibility into work
order dates like release date, actual completion date, etc.
7.13. Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite

Oracle is discontinuing Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite
as of August 3, 2018. Oracle will support this app, but will not deliver any new updates to
the app.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite 96
7.13.2. Overview
With Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite, project
managers and shop floor personnel can quickly search and manage project inventory on
the go.
- Search project on-hand material by item, project and task across operating units
- View project on-hand quantities by project locator
- View outstanding project borrow and payback transactions
- Identify project materials for transfer and borrow/payback
- Collaborate in transaction context using device features including email, phone,
and text
Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite is compatible with
of Oracle Discrete Manufacturing, with mobile services configured on the server side by
for Discrete Manufacturing get additional capability for exception management.


There are accessibility improvements in the Work Orders Tile page, Related Information


In previous versions, Oracle Mobile Project Manufacturing for Oracle E-Business Suite
was available only for iOS devices. Starting with version 1.2.0, the app is now available
for Android devices as well.


7.13.5.2. Translation Support


iOS devices
(MAF) 2.3.1

server
(MAF) 2.4.0
8. New and Changed Features in Process Manufacturing
8.1. Oracle Inventory (Inventory Convergence)

8.1.1. Overview
Process Inventory features and functionality are now incorporated into Oracle Inventory.
With this release, customers of Oracle’s Process Manufacturing applications can now use
Oracle Inventory and Oracle Warehouse Management. The use of a single inventory
application provides the Oracle Process Manufacturing user seamless integration with the
rest of the e-Business Suite. This feature opens additional functionality that was
previously only available to Discrete Oracle Inventory users, such as vendor-managed
and consigned inventory, reservations, move order requisitions, kanban, min-max
replenishment and robust physical inventory and cycle counting functionality. The
ability to implement Oracle Warehouse Management allows users to leverage
sophisticated picking rules, license plates (LPN’S), putaway rules and task management.
Information on the features of Oracle Inventory and Warehouse Management can be
obtained from data sheets and release content documents for these applications.
Process Inventory forms and reports are available for viewing and reporting of historical
data. This release also includes the migration of Process Inventory data into Oracle
Inventory.
In order to support the needs of process manufacturing organizations, several additional
features have been added to Oracle Inventory:
• Dual unit of measure control for any item
• Advanced lot control
• Material Status
• Enhanced inventory allocation rules
8.1.2. Features
8.1.2.1. Dual unit of measure control for any item

Process manufacturers often need to track inventory in two different units of measure,
which has been a main feature of Process Inventory. This functionality is now
incorporated into Oracle Inventory to support “catch weights” and other uses of dual unit
inventory tracking. Prices can be calculated in Order Management, based on either
unit. Oracle Inventory's Dual Unit of Measure Control enables users to transact
inventory in two unrelated units of measure where the conversion between the measures
varies from lot to lot or from one transaction to the next. If an item is dual unit of
measure control enabled, during transactions, users are prompted to enter the transaction
quantity in both units and can query on hand balances, availability and reservations in
both units for full supply chain visibility to all required handling units of measure.
8.1.2.2. Advanced lot control

Lot control is a critical feature used by process manufacturers to track and manage their
inventory. They often need to get answers to such questions as: 'Which lots were
delivered to which customers? Which lots were produced from that production line
during that shift? What was the quality of the components or ingredients and which
suppliers sent them?' To enable better visibility to a lot, its genealogy and attributes,
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Inventory (Inventory Convergence) 99
significant enhancements have been made to the lot tracking capabilities within Oracle
Inventory.
Sublot control, a feature supported in Process Inventory, has been incorporated into
Oracle Inventory and allows users to track the parent lot from which multiple lots were
created. Sublots have been replaced with Child Lots. The parent lot may refer to the
production batch that spawned the lot but, if the output of that batch varies in term of
grade or other QC attributes, multiple child lots might be received into inventory. Users
can query lots by their parent lot and view the parent lot in the lot genealogy form.
A lot can be grade controlled – a feature supported in Process Inventory, but one that is
new to Oracle Inventory. The product can be queried by grade and the grade can be
changed as required. Users can also track retest dates, expiration and retest actions
among other lot attributes. In addition, a new concurrent request in Oracle Inventory can
initiate a workflow if a lot or serial approaches any key milestone dates such as
expiration, retest, or best-by date.
The genealogy form in Oracle Inventory has also been enhanced to allow users to view
quality inspection results from OPM Quality, material status, grade change history and
other information about the lot. The genealogy gives you history on transactions for this
lot, as well as its source, such as where it was purchased or from which batch it
originated. These features and more can provide materials managers with the tools they
need to enable faster turn-around on quality, customer care and production issues.
8.1.2.3. Material status

Quality Control and product lifecycle issues may require that certain material, although
stored in a ready to use state in the warehouse or production facility, may not be usable
for certain applications. A lot that has not yet passed inspection will not be shipped to a
customer or consumed in production. A warehouse location that has been discovered to
have erroneous inventory balances would not be included in available to promise
calculations. In Process Inventory, material could be controlled using Lot Status. In
Oracle Inventory, this functionality is called Material Status. This feature was previously
only available to Oracle Warehouse Management users, but is now available to all Oracle
Inventory users. It enables you to assign a material status to the material in an inventory
lot, serial, subinventory or locator and to use that status to restrict transactions. The
associated material statuses dictate which transactions can be performed on the lot, the
serial or the material that is stored in the subinventory or locator. In addition, Oracle's
planning applications and Inventory's availability calculations take the material status
into consideration when determining availability. Users can determine whether product
of a particular status can be reservable, included in ATP calculations or netted in
production planning. Using material status, warehouse employees, materials managers,
production planners and customer service representatives can be provided with a more
granular and accurate picture of the inventory that is available for them to use for each
business purpose.
8.1.2.4. Enhanced inventory allocation rules

Inventory allocation rules control how inventory is assigned to a move order or other
request for inventory from Manufacturing or Order Management. These rules are being
enhanced to incorporate functionality from Process Inventory, as well as build on the
existing rules in Oracle Inventory. The allocation rules allow you to pick inventory by:
• Ordering based on lot number, item revision, subinventory and stock locator
• Picking inventory based on lot expiration or creation dates and receipt dates
• Allowing the selection of single or multiple lots
• Matching on customer specifications
• Allowing the partial allocation of a request
8.1.2.5. Migrating to Oracle Inventory

As part of the upgrade to this release, data from Process Inventory can be migrated into
Oracle Inventory. The migrated data includes:
• Current onhand inventory balances, which can be migrated as starting balances in
Oracle Inventory
• Lot and sublot master records, which can be migrated to the Oracle Inventory lot
master tables
• Lot and sublot conversions, which can be migrated into a new Oracle Inventory
table
• Lot statuses, which can be migrated as Material Statuses
• Inventory profiles, which can be migrated into new Organization Parameter
fields
• Allocation rules for Order Management and Process Execution
• Items, which already exist in Oracle Inventory, and can be updated for new
attributes and organization assignments
There is master data in Process Inventory that already exists in Oracle Inventory. This
data cannot be modified and includes:
• Inventory organizations created as Process Warehouses
• Stock locators created as Process Warehouse Locations
• Subinventories created for Process Warehouses
Some data in Process Inventory cannot be migrated, mostly because it is historical data
that cannot be altered. This includes:
• Completed inventory transactions
• Pending inventory transactions
• Physical and cycle count data
• e-Records and e-Signatures against inventory transactions
8.1.2.6. Viewing historical data

For data that cannot be migrated to Oracle Inventory, Process Inventory forms and
reports can remain accessible. These forms include mostly query screens, which only
allow the viewing of data. The historical data cannot be modified through these or other
forms. All Process Inventory reports can be available and can print the historical data
that remains in the Process Inventory tables. For users who do not have prior releases,
Process Inventory tables, menus and forms cannot be installed. For current Process
Inventory users, the historical data can be displayed using the following forms:
• Transaction Inquiry
• Lot Genealogy
• Query Item Master
• Posted Journal Inquiry
Since the inventory migration can zero out any inventory balances in Process Inventory,
there can be limited use of the Item Inquiry form, which displays onhand inventory. It
can still be accessible, but little or no data can be displayed on that form. The same
applies to the Allocated Summary and Unallocated Inventory queries. Most of the
reports that display historical or master data can be available to print information from
Process Inventory.
8.1.3. Release 12.2
8.1.3.1. Advanced Catch-Weight

Catch Weight management applies primarily to the manufacturing, distribution and
consumer product industries where weights can vary from piece to piece, either due to
biological variations, or because of weight loss that occurs during storage. This
variability affects the procurement pricing and sales invoicing processes. A distinction
must be made between the fulfillment unit of measure and a valuation unit of measure.
While the fulfillment unit is the leading unit for all processes in operative logistics, the
valuation and payment flows take place based on the valuation unit. The logistic units
often used are pieces, cases or each; the valuation units often used are Kilogram/Pound.
Although the term “catch weight” is most-used in the food industry, this feature could be
leveraged by a range of industries including those that manage products with variable
lengths.
As the raw material flows through the manufacturing process, the likelihood of finished
product not adhering to standard conversions is high. Even after storage, the finished
product can lose or gain weight due to heat or humidity in the facility. One storage
locator can have products from multiple process batches or lots in multiple license plates
(LPNs) which each have a different weight.
Most consumer-packaged goods companies cost and invoice by weight and fulfill by
units. As a result of this, items are mostly defined with a Primary UOM of weight and a
Secondary UOM of units. For a warehouse resource involved in the fulfillment process,
a pallet of boxes of beef looks the same irrespective of the batch or lot or LPN. For this
reason, flexibility is needed regarding which UOM to use for fulfillment.
The Advanced Catch-Weight solution addresses this problem by introducing the concept
of a Fulfillment Base at the sales order line level. The Fulfillment Base is driven from
the Ordered UOM class and can either be the Primary UOM or the Secondary UOM.
Fulfillment Base is honored in warehouse management while fulfilling the order line.
Enhancements have also been made to Order Management, Advanced Pricing, Shipping,
and Mobile Supply Chain Applications to support this solution. Please refer to the
Advanced Catch-Weight Solution in Oracle E-Business Suite Applications technical brief
for additional details [ID 1551171.1].
These features are available through Oracle Inventory.
8.1.5. Third Party Integration Points
Refer to the Oracle Inventory RCD for information on additional third-party integration
points.
8.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Product Development

8.2.1. Overview
Oracle Process Manufacturing Product Development gives you the tools to streamline the
development of new products from early experimental stages through piloting and into
full production. Recipe management meets industry standards, including S88.03.
Formulas and routings can be fine-tuned using graphical manipulation, formula analysis
and simulation/optimization tools. Workflow and status control allow you to track and
control each step of the product lifecycle, while least cost formulation provides guidance
on the optimal formula based on cost and available inventory.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Product Development 102
Product Development integrates with Process Execution, Process Costing and Advanced
Supply Chain Planning to give you a complete recipe and product management solution.
8.2.2. Features
8.2.2.1. Inventory Convergence Impact on Product Development Workbench

The workbench provides users with an interface that increases visibility to recipes and
their components, along with access to all the forms necessary to create, copy, and
maintain formulations and routings.
One of the workbench features is the ability to change the “View By” context. Some of
the different options are View By Class, Product, Plant, Lab, etc. Queries on this form
can need to be modified for convergence to look at the new Item and Organization tables.
8.2.2.2. Inventory Convergence Impact on Formula Management

There are several requirements for Formulas. Users can be able to maintain Global and
Local Recipes (S88 Compliance). The owning organization for a formula can continue to
function with inventory organizations that can be defined as either a Plant or Lab.
Formulas can also work with the standard Oracle Applications Item Master
(MTL_SYSTEM_ITEMS).
Formula Security
Formula Security enables users to restrict access to formulas by user, responsibility and
organization using Oracle 8i/9i Virtual Private Database (VPD). Three levels of security
are possible – Update, View-Only, and Hidden. Each Formula has one Owning
Organization, and this is the attribute generally used to determine whether a formula is
accessible by others. There is also the concept of “Other Organization”, that determines
if someone from another organization can access formulas.
The requirement is to provide an organization migration so that none of the organizations
listed in the security tables are removed, and to maintain the integrity of the user-
organization table and function (or replace it with an equivalent).
8.2.2.3. Inventory Convergence Impact on Routings

Routings can continue to maintain a valid link to the organizations referenced in the
routing header. Routings can also be renamed to Process Routings to avoid confusion
with Routings used in Discrete Mfg.
8.2.2.4. Inventory Convergence Impact on Operations

Operations can continue to maintain a valid link to the organizations referenced in the
routing header. Operations cannot be organization specific.
To differentiate between Operations in Discrete Mfg and Process Mfg, Operations can be
renamed to Process Operations.
8.2.2.5. Inventory Convergence Impact on Recipe Management

Recipes can continue to use the default organization as the Creation Organization and the
initial Owning Organization. Additionally, more S88 compliance can be added. To
classify recipes by S88 Recipe Type, a new field can be introduced as part of the recipe
header that enables users to categorize each recipe as a General, Site, or Master Recipe.
A new View by for Recipes can be available from the Product Development Workbench
with a General Recipe at the top of the list, followed by all of its Site Recipes, and each
site displaying all of its Master Recipes. Also, General and Site recipe types can be
defaulted when new recipes are created. Recipes created under a Master Inventory
Organization can default to ‘General’ recipe type, while recipes created under all other
Inventory Organizations can default to ‘Site’ recipe type.
Recipe and Validity Rule security can continue to be supported through user,
responsibility and organization associations and via Formula Security.
Validity Rules
One or more Validity Rules can be associated with each recipe. A validity rule
determines when, where and under what circumstances a recipe can be used to create a
batch, to plan with, or base standard costs upon. The inventory-org field on each validity
rule determines which plant (inventory-org) the recipe is valid for. Leaving the
inventory-org field blank means that the recipe can be used in any plant. Plant specific
validity rules enable the maintainer of a recipe to restrict the use to a subset of plants.
Requirement: For global validity rules, validity rules would be applicable for “All”
inventory-orgs. For inventory-org specific validity rules, the inventory-org LOV and
validation would be restricted to Plants (inventory-orgs).
Recipe Overrides
Once a process engineer knows which materials can be processed in a given set of
equipment, they may want to adjust some of the default values in a recipe. For example,
the viscosity of different liquids may require machines to be run at different speeds,
effect throughput, and impact process loss, which accounts for 3 different fields that
would be adjusted. Therefore, we’ve provided a number of process-specific override
fields. These fields are plant (inventory-org) specific and permit the user to adjust the
recipe to be more flexible and more accurate. This reduces changes that need to be made
in the batch as well as batch variances, provides for more effective planning, and more
accurate standard costs.
The inventory-org for overriding data would be restricted to Labs & Plants.
8.2.2.6. Inventory Convergence Impact on Technical Data

Technical Parameters are either Global or Lab specific attributes that are ultimately
associated with Items in a Formula. These are not item specific, but a Lab organization
may be required to create them. The requirement is to ensure that the convergence
project offers a way to define both Global (all orgs) and Lab-specific Technical
Parameters. LOV can only display labs.
Technical Parameter Sequences offers users a way to both sequence and configure the
data that appears on the Simulator. The requirement is to retain the ability to continue
using Lab organizations, Experimental and Inventory Items, and Item Categories.
Once Technical Parameters are established for a Lab, they can be associated with any
number of items (ingredients, products, and byproducts) thus becoming item attributes.
Each Item can have different technical data, and each Lot for that Item can also have its
own technical data value. Item Technical Data can be typed into the Item Technical Data
form or derived from Quality Results. Item Technical Data is also Lab specific.
When a formula or batch is loaded onto the simulator to perform “what if” scenarios
and/or allocations, the item technical data is displayed in order to help users decide upon
the best formulation.
The requirement for Item Technical Data is to ensure that Lab organizations are
maintained and the Item master is accessible for both Experimental and Inventory Items.
8.2.2.7. Inventory Convergence Impact on Simulator

The Simulator displays each ingredient, product, and byproduct in a formula or batch
with the quantity and technical parameter values for each. The Simulator is used to
display and edit formulas, batches, and the technical parameter values of the items, to
display the effects that changes to ingredient values have on the product values, and to
make or change batch allocations based on these values.
1. Organizations –
The Spreadsheet uses two different organizations fields. The first one is the Lab the
user is working in, and this Lab Organization determines which technical parameters
and technical data are displayed. The Lab Org is always used by the spreadsheet and
is set by the Profile Option “GMD: Default Lab”. The other organization field is
Plant, which is used only when a Batch is loaded on the spreadsheet. The Plant field
is part of the unique identifier for a Batch, and determines in which plant the
inventory allocations can occur.
The spreadsheet will continue to support Lab organizations and Plants and allow
these two different organizations to be used in the same form simultaneously.
2. Items –
Both Experimental and Inventory Items can be used on the spreadsheet. Normally
the items are loaded via the formula or batch, but items can also be added to the
spreadsheet through an LOV of the Item master table.
If a Formula is loaded onto the Spreadsheet, any new items added would be restricted
to those items associated with the formula owning organization. If a Batch is loaded
on the Spreadsheet, the list of available items would be restricted to the items
associated with the Plant (inventory org) the batch is associated with.
The spreadsheet supports of both Experimental and Inventory Items.
3. Lots/Sublots –
When working with either formulas or batches, the pick lots form can be invoked to
add lots/sublots or change allocations. There is also an Add Lot form. This feature
exists as of OPM Family Pack K (11.5.10) and stems from a requirement called
‘Pooling’.
While working with a Formula, the addition on lots/sublots is unrestricted. While
working with a Batch, the addition of lots/sublots is restricted to those warehouses
from which the Plant can consume inventory. When a batch is updated on the
spreadsheet, authorized users have the ability to update the actual batch and its
allocations.
The spreadsheet’s ability to pick from inventory using the same rules it presently
does, and update batches (which in turn may update inventory allocations and
balances) has been maintained during Inventory convergence.
8.2.2.8. Inventory Convergence Impact on Formula Analysis, Formula Inquiry,

Indented BOM
These three functions are analysis tools that display different aspects of a Formula. In
each case, Organization and/or Item may be used as a parameter to run the analysis.
The LOV for organizations would always be restricted to the current user’s User-
Organization associations.
If an Item is used as a parameter, then the program would validate that the item belongs
to at least one organization that the user is associated with.
If Formula Security is activated, then the parameters, LOVs and queries themselves will
continue to recognize the security policies. Units of Measure – Since each organization
may have its own default UOM, each of these reports can take this into consideration.
• Formula Analysis – UOM is a runtime parameter, so any UOM can be chosen (if
the necessary UOM conversions exist).
• Formula Inquiry – The original Formula UOMs is used.
• Indented BOM – This report offers a choice of UOMs – either the Formula UOM
or Inventory UOM. If Inventory UOM is chosen, then it uses the default UOM
of the organization under which the report was submitted (the User’s default
org).
8.2.2.9. Inventory Convergence Impact on Mass Search and Replace

Mass Search and Replace enables the identification and replacement of key components
in formulas, routings, operations, and recipes for single or multiple organizations. The
basic features of search and replace permit the query for fundamental components such as
the name, version, description, owner, and status. Advanced search and replace features
facilitate the search and replacement of components using conditions and specific values
in formulas, routings, operations, and recipes.
Within the new item-organization model, the list of ingredients that are available for
replacing in a formula are limited to only those items associated with the User’s
organizations.
8.2.2.10. Inventory Convergence Impact on Product Development Workflow and

ERES
Status helps determine how a product development entity (formula, recipe, etc.) can be
used. For instance, a “New” formula can allow users to make modifications to it and
manipulate it using simulation tools. A formula that is “Approved for Lab Use” can be
modified to a certain extent but is generally used for creating Lab Batches. “Approved
for General Use” means the formula is usable by all programs that need it and normally
cannot be updated, while “On-Hold” and “Obsolete” mean the formula cannot be used.
These workflows are also configurable by organization
8.2.2.11. Item Substitution lists associated with the Item Master

Item Substitution Lists can be definable. An Item Substitution List is simply a list of
alternative items associated with the Item Master with a version and status. Once these
substitution lists are associated with an Item and approved, they can be used by any
Formula in which the Item is used as an Ingredient. When a new substitution list is
created, the user must be provided with a list of Formulas that contain the source item so
that they can choose which formulas this substitute would be associated with. Once the
list of formulas is chosen, the formula line detail for the relevant ingredient can have
access to the substitution list.
8.2.2.12. Effective Formulas

Once substitutes become part of a Formula, the Planning, Costing and Production
applications will see these substitutes as the active, effective ingredient. Visibility to the
substitute items, and a method to force these applications to look for the active substitutes
rather than the original ingredient in the formula has been provided.
Once a new, effective substitution is added to a Formula, approving this change the user
would be given the option to update all Pending batches that contain the original
ingredient. The original ingredient and its allocations would be deleted and replaced with
the new, unallocated item.
8.2.2.13. One to One Substitutions
Item Substitution lists may consist of only one item, a one for one substitution.
The one-to-one replacement of ingredients within Formulas and Batches is supported.
The software currently allows ingredients to be substituted without an item substitution
list, and this method would continue to be supported.
Ingredient substitutions within Batches would be limited to Batches in a status of
Pending.
8.2.2.14. Using Substitute Items with Planning

Substitutions are also visible to the Advanced Planning and Scheduling software. This
can allow planning to determine a plant’s capability to utilize one or more substitute
items in a formula, thereby enabling the plant to have the capability to promise a product
if one of the ingredients can be properly substituted.
Ingredient Substitutions in Formulas can allow the Capability to Promise Model that is
being utilized with Advanced Planning and Scheduling to determine if the facility can
make the product by determining if either the original item on the formula or the
component substitute item are available at the facility to produce the item that is being
requested.
Effective dates and Preference are considered in order to determine the best choice of
ingredients.
8.2.2.15. Least Cost Formulation: Product Specifications

The user, generally a formulator, can enter a complete product specification in the
software that represents the target properties of the product(s) that must be met as part of
the least cost formulation. This includes a form/table to define each individual
requirement, and a form/table to define the product specific requirements including
min/max quantities, etc.
The Product Specification can also be used by the Least Cost Formulation program to
generate formulas and batches.
8.2.2.16. Least Cost Formulation: Generate Formulas based on Least Cost

The system generates least cost formulas while meeting the requirements defined within
the product specification. Two methods of formula generation are supported:
• Loading an existing formula into a tool like the simulator/optimizer and optimizing the
ingredients based on the latest costs available while meeting the requirements from the
product specification.
• Creating a new formula where no ingredients have been previously entered – the new formula
would be based completely upon the least cost and product specification.
8.2.2.17. Least Cost Formulation: Create Batches Based on Cost

The system generates least cost batches while meeting the requirements defined within
the product specification. Two methods of batch generation are supported:
• Loading an existing batch into a tool like the simulator/optimizer and optimizing the
ingredients and lot allocations based on the latest costs available while meeting the
requirements from the product specification.
• Creating a new batch where no formula/recipe has been previously entered – the batch’s bill
of materials would be based completely upon the least cost, product specification, and
available inventory. See the requirement below ‘Generate Batches without a predefined
Formula’ for more details.
8.2.2.18. Least Cost Formulation: Specify which Costs to Use
Any cost method can be used as part of the optimization equation- standard, actual, and
lot costs
Users of least cost formulation specify which costs to use to determine the least cost, and
the retrieves costs that already exist in costing tables. Users do not have to enter costs
specifically for least cost formulation.
The ability to compare the actual cost of the intended input materials with the standard
cost of the materials specified for the batch by the formula prior to the actual batch
becoming WIP is provided
8.2.2.19. Least Cost Formulation: Generate Batches without a Predefined

Formula
In order to create a batch that uses the least cost materials and also meets the product
specifications, the software is not restricted to a pre-defined formula with a set list of
ingredients. The least cost formulation program looks at the Product Specification and
on-hand materials to generate the optimal formulation. The formulation (batch) created
from this process would likely be used only one time, since it’s using a snapshot of
available inventory that may not exist again, however could be used for a week’s plan.
8.2.2.20. Least Cost Formulation: Choose Materials based on Categories or

Substitute Items
The least cost formulation program can find the best materials to allocate based on the
attributes of the available materials. However, there are some restrictions around which
materials can be chosen for a given formula or batch. For instance, if the %FAT attribute
is considered as part of the equation for making Ice Cream, the LCF program would NOT
choose a material from the Meat family that has %FAT as an attribute.
8.2.2.21. Least Cost Formulation: Select Formula/Recipe based on Least Cost

As part of the Production processes, a user can choose the least cost formula. For
instance, when creating an individual batch, the software would identify to the user the
least cost formula or sort the possible choices in order from least cost to most cost.
8.2.3. Release 12.0.6 (RUP6)
8.2.3.1. Fixed Process Loss

You can define the fixed process loss for all the batches using the Routing or Recipe
windows. You can define the priority for applying the fixed process loss at various levels
similar to variable process loss. You can apply the fixed process loss in addition to the
variable loss. The fixed process loss is applied after calculating the variable loss and it is
added to the ingredient quantity or reduced from the product quantity based on how the
batch is created. You can select ‘Apply Fixed Process Loss’ check box, if the parameter
Apply Fixed Process Loss is set to Manually. It is by default un-checked on the Create
Batch/Firm Planned Order window.
8.2.3.2. DFF for Step Material Associations

Before Release 12.0.6, within the Recipe window and Step quantity tab, the DFF
flexfield was not available, even though it was set up. A descriptive flex field (DFF) is a
field that is comprised of segments. A flex field appears in a pop up window when you
click on the flex field icon. Each segment has a name and a set of valid values. Using
Descriptive flex fields you can store additional information about each step depending on
the values you enter in the Step Materials window. In Release 12.0.6, DFF for step
materials provides additional information like the registration of the sequence in which
the ingredients need to be consumed. The Descriptive Flex Field window displays the
flex field segments based on the Recipe Step Material associations flex field defined in
the Applications Developer responsibility.
8.2.4. Release 12.2.6
8.2.4.1. Planned Yield

You can define the planned yield for an operation in the Operations window, which gets
defaulted as the planned yield of the operation in the Routing window and user can
override it. In the Recipe window, the planned yield defined at a routing step is defaulted
for each operation and user can override it. System calculates the yield at the recipe level
based on the scaled formula quantities and the yield defined at each operation level.
8.2.5. Release 12.2.10
8.2.5.1. Version Control Attributes for revising entities in Product Development

You can define version control sets for each entity, Formula, Operation, Routing and
Recipe with the attributes that drive the version control of the entity as enabled. The
updates to formulas, operations, routings and recipes would create a new version based
on the version control set assigned to the organization’s product development parameters.
• Oracle BOM (where the Item Master resides)
8.3. Oracle Regulatory Management

8.3.1. Overview
Oracle® Regulatory Management is a regulatory information management tool providing
hazardous material information to critical components of Oracle’s E-Business Suite. This
application enables any industries that store or ship hazardous materials to comply with
industry and government regulations. Automatically attach Material Safety Data Sheets
and other critical safety documents to Sales Orders and Shipments. Print and distribute
any safety documents as a standard part of your shipping and transportation
documentation. Oracle’s built-in “Attachments” feature will automatically associate the
safety document with the appropriate sales order line and shipments, and as part of the
Ship Confirm process your document set will be include all related safety documents.
The authoring of safety documents, along with the logic involved with adhering to
legislation and regulations, will no longer be supported from Oracle Regulatory
Management. We are working with some key vendors in this field and provide an open
interface for inbound and outbound data necessary to support these features.
8.3.2. Features
8.3.2.1. Regulatory Item Migration

Regulatory information (e.g., items, properties) is accessible to both discrete and process
items as part of our Product Information Management solution. This will provide an
easier integration to other applications like order management and shipping, and discrete
manufacturing will also be able to create regulatory items.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Regulatory Management 109
8.3.2.2. Regulatory Item Properties Migration
Regulatory Item Properties are an integral part of an item’s definition, currently in use by
OPM customers. Continuing support of these properties as part of the standard bundle is
available, while visibility and access to them are necessary from the discrete item master
8.3.2.3. Regulatory Formula Migration

Regulatory Formulas are formulas expressed in percentages – for instance, Hydrochloric
Acid is 95% Water, 5% Hydrogen Chloride. This data will be migrated to the Formula
Master in OPM Product Development. This will enable users of Product Development,
Process Execution, and even Costing to use regulatory data as part of their decision-
making process. It is also integral to the export of data to 3rd party applications in order
to properly report on the concentration level of hazardous substances.
8.3.2.4. Track the distribution of Safety Documents – Dispatch History

Dispatch history is information regarding documents that have been sent – what
document (and version), who they’ve been sent to, which items they were sent for, and
when. Oracle will capture the dispatch history of all documents sent out via Shipping,
and we’ll also provide a method to synchronize the Dispatch History with 3rd party
applications. There are 3 features related to this:
Public API to Store Dispatch Information
An API will be created to write Document Dispatch information to the new document
dispatch history table. The old document dispatch history table (gr_dispatch_histories)
will no longer be supported.
Form for Manual Entry of Dispatch Information
A new form will be created to support the manual entry of Document Dispatch
information, as well as for displaying existing document dispatch history records. Users
will be able to view the dispatched document from this form.
Dispatch History Report
A report will be created, using XML Publisher, to print Document Dispatch History. It
will be able to select data by Recipient, Document Type, Dispatch Method, Item and by
Dispatch Date. The XML that is generated by this report can also be sent to the 3rd
Party application in order to keep the document dispatch history synchronized between
the Oracle applications and the 3rd Party application.
8.3.2.5. OPM Data available for export – Item Property Data

Oracle data must be made available for export so that partners who are specialize in
document generation, new regulations, phrase libraries, ingredient databases, etc. can
produce the documents and supply the data we need for a complete solution. Documents
will then be stored within the E-Business suite. A Public API is provided to export
regulatory data in XML format using XML Gateway.
8.3.2.6. Document Rebuild Required Workflow

A new workflow has been created to send a notification to the Regulatory Manager when
a Regulatory Document would be rebuilt due to a change in Regulatory Item Properties
or a change in a Validity Rule/Formula that is used for a Regulatory Document.
8.3.2.7. Regulatory Document Printing
A new concurrent program will be created to allow a user to print a copy of a Regulatory
Document for an item. It will accept a range so that documents for more than one item
can be printed at one time.
8.3.2.8. Sales Order Document Required API

A new procedure will be created to determine if there are any hazardous materials
included on this Sales Order. If so, a message will be sent to the 3rd Party application to
retrieve the Sales Order information to determine if a new regulatory document must be
generated.
8.3.2.9. Shipping Attachment API

A new procedure will be created to determine if an MSDS must be attached to a
Shipment line so that it can be printed and distributed with the rest of the Shipping
documents. If distribution is required and a document has not already been attached, the
procedure will attach the document to the shipment line.
8.3.2.10. Print Regulatory Shipping Documents API

The existing API that prints Regulatory documents along with the rest of the shipping
documents will be modified to call the Document Dispatch History API for each
Regulatory document that is printed.
8.3.2.11. Regulatory Document Portal

A new portal will be created that will allow our customer’s customers to have access to
the current MSDS document for a given product. They will be able to search for the
document using several different criteria.
8.3.2.12. Territory Profiles form

The Territory Profiles form that was removed for release 11.5.9 will be re-instated. The
data entered in that form will be used by the Shipping Attachments API to determine
which document would be attached to the shipping line.
8.3.2.13. 3rd Party Data Change Workflow

A new workflow will be created to send a notification to the Regulatory Manager when a
message is received from the 3rd Party application stating that data received from Oracle
Applications has been changed in the 3rd Party application. The notification will contain
a list of the attributes that were changed for an item, as well as the value from the 3rd
Party application.
8.3.3. Release 12.0.6 (RUP6)
8.3.3.1. OPM Regulatory Management: European Regulatory Compliance

Three Field Name APIs were added to support the European Regulatory Compliance
feature. Currently, you can view, edit, and delete field names, field name classes, field
name properties, risk phrases, and safety phrases, the standard codes and descriptions for
which are seeded in the OPM Regulatory Management application. With this
enhancement, you can now create new field names, field name classes, field name
properties, risk phrases, and safety phrases. This enables you to enter organization
specific values for the new field name properties for a regulatory item. You can also
create risk and safety phrases that are text –based only and associate them to organization
specific regulatory items. The enhancement also lets you create and maintain hazard
classes and their descriptions in multiple languages without the installation of the
languages in the application, and associate them to regulatory items
8.3.4. Release 12.1.1
8.3.4.1. Regulatory Partner Certification

In order to provide a complete solution for companies to comply with industry and
government regulations, Oracle Process Manufacturing (OPM) Regulatory Management
application provides the ability to integrate with 3rd-party applications for the purpose of
Regulatory document generation.
A user can generate regulatory documents in a 3rd-party application based upon item
physical property values received from OPM Regulatory Management. The generated
documents can then be uploaded into the OPM Regulatory Management system where
they will be stored within Oracle Applications and can be attached to any applicable
object. The documents can be distributed from within Oracle Applications along with
shipping documents or can be printed/faxed/emailed to recipients. The documents can
also be distributed from within the 3rd-party applications, with the ability to synchronize
dispatch history between OPM Regulatory Management and the 3rd-party application.

• XML Gateway
• OPM Product Development
• Oracle BOM (Item master)
• Oracle E-Records
• AME
• Oracle Workflow

• Atrion
• The Wercs
8.4. Oracle Process Manufacturing Process Execution

8.4.1. Overview
Oracle® Process Manufacturing Process Execution provides functionality unique to
process industries. Oracle Process Manufacturing Process Execution ensures
manufacturing consistency throughout the production cycle by providing tight control of
ingredients and processes, balanced with the flexibility to respond to changing
conditions. OPM Process Execution supports bulk, continuous flow, and hybrid
manufacturing for make-to-stock and make-to-order environments. This capability lets
you build bulk runs, for example, as needed for economical stock quantities. It also
provides scheduling flexibility allowing you to schedule runs during specified hours,
shifts, days, or weeks depending upon your business needs.
Inventory Convergence is a major change in R12. The Process Inventory and Oracle
Inventory applications will be converged into a single system that will be used to manage
inventory across the entire Oracle E-Business Suite seamlessly, regardless of the type of
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Process Execution 112
manufacturing that a business employs. Process features are added to Oracle Inventory to
support Process characteristics, such as dual units of measure, grade, child lots as a
subdivision of lot-controlled inventory, and the use of material status.
As a result, Process Execution has been modified and enhanced to use Oracle Inventory.
The existing cross-functional integrations with Advanced Planning and Scheduling and
Order Management will be preserved, while leveraging Warehouse Management System
functions.
In addition, several other smaller enhancements are made in Process Execution.
8.4.2. Features
8.4.2.1. Impact of Inventory Convergence on Process Execution

Process Execution is now using the Oracle organization structure and converged Oracle
Inventory Item Master, transactions, and reservations. This includes the following
changes.
Organization Structure
Inventory Organizations – Batches and Firm Planned Orders (FPO’s) take place in an
inventory organization that is defined as a plant, a research and development laboratory,
or both.
Subinventories and Locators – Batches consume from and yield into subinventories and
locators within the inventory organization.
Organization Parameters – Existing Process Execution profile options are migrated to
organization-specific parameters. This will make it easier to set business rules by
organization.
Items and Master Data
Item entry and validation – A multi-segment item number is supported, and any item
entered on a batch or FPO must be designated in the item master for that inventory
organization as “Process Manufacturing Enabled”.
Item revisions – The item revision capability in Oracle Inventory is extended to items in
Process-enabled inventory organizations when establishing setup data and performing
inventory transactions. The user will be able to specify a desired revision on a
formula/batch material line and will be required to enter a revision on material
transactions for items that are revision controlled.
Material status, grade, action, and reason code migration – Material status, grade, quality
actions, and reason code support and security will be migrated to Oracle Inventory.
Therefore, any lookups for these entities are replaced to reference the Oracle Inventory
tables.
Reservations
Reservations replace the ‘pending lot allocations’ used currently in batches. Unlike the
current pending lot allocations, however, detailed reservations are ‘hard’ reservations;
once you have reserved material to a batch, other sources of demand are prevented from
reserving or using this inventory.
High Level and Detailed Reservations – Batches support high level and detailed
reservations, enabling users to guarantee that inventory will be available to a batch. High
level reservations are at the organization level and detailed reservations are at the lot,
subinventory and locator level. Users will also be able to enter partially detailed
reservations, specifying, for example, the lot but not the subinventory or locator.
Automatic creation of detailed reservations – Detailed reservations can be created by the
system using picking rules to select the inventory. This is analogous to the auto allocation
functionality that currently exists in OPM. The material can be selected based on the
same criteria that are currently used in auto allocation, such as First-In-First-Out or First-
Expired-First-Out rules, and single/multi lot rules.
Select Available Inventory screen – Material can be selected and reserved from the new
Select Available Inventory screen. This replaces the current Pick Lots/Locations screen
and allows you to select from a list of available inventory.
Manual entry of detailed reservations – Detailed reservations can be entered manually.
Reserving from other documents – In addition to reserving from onhand inventory to a
batch, you can reserve from other sources of supply to other sources of demand. For
example, a batch will be able to reserve the pending supply from a purchase order. The
pending product yield from one scheduled batch can be reserved to an ingredient line of
another batch. The pending product yield from a batch can also be reserved to a sales
order.
Transaction Model
Transaction types will be either renamed or new ones created to support the issuing and
return of ingredients, and the yield or return of products, coproducts, and byproducts.
Lot Genealogy – All lots consumed by or yielded by batches will be viewable from the
Oracle Inventory Lot Genealogy inquiry.
Move Orders
The optional use of move orders will be supported to control the movement of material
from the warehouse to the shop floor.
Mobile Supply Chain Applications
Process Execution will support the use of mobile devices for many batch activities, such
as the entry of ingredient consumption, product yield, and resource usage.
Warehouse Management
Customers who purchase the Warehouse Management System (WMS) will be able to use
this with Process Execution. Process Execution and WMS will interact through the use of
move orders. WMS Picking and Putaway rules will be available for use with Process
Execution, and you will be able to yield product into an LPN. An LPN, or License Plate
Number, is the basic entity managed by WMS; it can, for example, represent a pallet or
similar grouping of inventory.
Viewing Historical Batch Data
Screens will be provided to allow users to view batches processed before Convergence.
These screens will be display-only and will allow the user to view all information
viewable on the 11i10 edit screens, by batch, including the inventory transaction data.
8.4.2.2. Screen Redesign

The Batches and Batch Material Details forms will be combined into a Batch Details
form to allow the user to see more information on one screen and reduce the need to
navigate between screens. Batch header information that was previously hidden by
default will be displayed on an Additional Information tab on the Batch Details screen.
8.4.2.3. Rescheduling of Scaled Batch

When a batch is scaled, the user will have the option of specifying that the batch duration
would be recalculated, and the batch rescheduled.
8.4.3. Release 12.1.1
8.4.3.1. Multi-Batch / Support for Mass Transactions

On the shop floor, due to the nature of the products being produced, batches of similar
nature will be sequenced and processed together. Transacting batches independently will
be time and resource consuming activity. To improve the usability and reduce the time
taken to transact batches, a new Mass Batch Actions form has been created. This provides
an option to transact several batches at one time.
The Mass Batch Actions form gives the user the ability to group batches based on
organization, product, recipe/version, formula/version, routing/version, operation/version,
batch status, planned start date/end date range and range of steps. Also the user will be
able to perform mass batch actions such as release, complete, close, reopen, revert to
WIP, un-release and auto detail on a set of batches based on the selection criteria.
8.4.3.2. Make-To-Order
Manufacturers need the ability to produce an item in response to a customer order. The
Customer Service Representative needs to have visibility of the Batch associated to the
order line. Data of particular relevance includes Planned / Actual Start dates, Planned
Completion dates and yield lot so that they may relay that information back to the
customer.
The Make-To-Order solution provides the ability to create a Batch or an FPO in response
to a Sales Order line. Configurable and flexible user defined rules will establish when an
order line qualifies for Make-to-Order. When an order is booked, processing will be
instigated for any qualifying lines to generate a new Batch or FPO as appropriate. The
Customer Service Representative will receive a notification advising of the Batch/FPO
creation and providing a cross reference of Sales and Batch/FPO numbers. The
Batch/FPO supply will be immediately reserved against the driving sales order line.
8.4.4. R12.2.5
8.4.4.1. Oracle Process Manufacturing Outside Processing (OSP) (also for

12.2.4+)
Manufacturers do not always have the capabilities or equipment to perform all the steps
in their manufacturing process to produce their products. Many times they must send
material out of their plant for a step in the process to produce their finished goods. When
this outside manufacturing is needed users must be able to indicate this in the routing and
track the material and cost when it leaves their facility. They also must apply the cost of
this outside processing to the overall cost of the finished good.
Key Features:
• Ability to define a Resource as Outside Processing Resource: Plant Resource
and Generic resource can be associated with an outside processing item, so that
the resource can be used for outside processing.
• Automatic creation of a Requisition at Batch Creation, Batch Release, or
Step Release: When there is an operation in a routing that is not performed in-
house and work/service is required, the software provides the ability to create a
Requisition for this work/service.
• Manual Creation of Requisitions: This option allows you to automatically
charge outside processing resources at an OSP step but does not link the creation
of the requisition to either creation or processing of the batch or step.
• Ability to define approvals as “Automatically/Manual” for PO/Req: This is

applicable when the Order is of high value and approvals are needed for the
purchase order to move ahead. The approval hierarchy must be set and this can
be handled only on need by basis. Although certain low value PO can be of pre-
approved nature as well.
• Manual Creation of Purchase Order and Lines: The user can define manual
Purchase order with outside processing items. For each purchase order line, a
batch that is to be charged needs to be specified. Transactions can be tracked.
Resource Cost or PO price can be used for resource costing depending on the flag
checked.
• Ability to receive full or partial quantity in an OPM enabled organization:
The Purchase Order can be received for the full or partial quantities and the
quantity delivered to the shop floor updates the OSP Actual step quantity.
• Managing Returns and Adjustments: Return of OSP item/service is allowed

for rework. Also, the capability to reverse over-receipts that are erroneously
transacted is allowed in the system.
• Ability to integrate with OPM Costing: The Purchase Order that was raised on
the vendor is for a service. The value of the service is added to the Product cost.
User will define a Standard Cost for the resource associated with the Outside
Processing step. The organization must be setup for Standard Cost. Also the
Standard rate flag to choose between Resource Cost and PO Price cost is to be
introduced. Actual cost and Lot cost to be supported in later releases.
• Synchronization of the Batch and Purchase Order: The system will

synchronize the Batch to the Purchase Order and back. The system synchronizes
the PO whenever there is a Batch action like:
o Batch Reschedule
o Step Reschedule
o Batch/step quantity change
o Re-routing
o Batch Cancel
o Batch Termination
8.4.4.2. Multiple Outside Processing Steps per Batch

• A Batch can have multiple OSP steps that can be associated with the same or the
different supplier. This can help enable the customer to have various suppliers
performing different operation in the batch.
8.4.4.3. Ability to open PO from Batch Detail Window from OSP

• Navigation has been improved to be able to open the PO or PO details
from the batch details form (from Actions / tools >PO) for OSP batches.
8.4.4.4. Oracle Process Manufacturing Batch Hold

• Manufacturers need to place a Batch on “Hold” to prevent further processing
until the conflict has been resolved. There are many events that can cause the
need to place a Batch on “Hold” including machine breakage, QC testing,
Supervisor signature, late/insufficient material, customer issues, engineering
changes, etc. The solution provides a number of options when placing a batch on
“Hold”. With a new field, “Mode”, of the batch where the default would be
“Run” for normal operation of the batch and when it is needed this would be
changed to “Hold’. There are also different types of hold to reflect what
functions can still be performed while a batch is being held.
8.4.5. Release 12.2.6
8.4.5.1. Yield Measurement

Yield measurement and improvement is a business-critical area of focus in multiple
industry segments. In the age of rising costs, increased competitive pressures, optimal
use of resources has become even more critical in the manufacturing processes. The new
solution developed includes the yield measurement at a batch step level, batch level,
product coming out of a batch level and finished products produced out of a hierarchy of
batches.
Key Features:
• Capture step transfer quantities: User can enter the intermediate quantity that
is transferred from one step to another step in the Batch Steps window.
• Calculate the yield for a batch step: System calculates the step level yield upon
the step completion based on the transfer quantities entered as the percentage of
the total output from the total input. System also computes the step level
cumulative yield, which is the yield across the steps from which the material is
flowing till the current step.
• Calculate the yield for a batch: System calculates the batch level yield upon the
batch completion as the percentage of the total output quantity produced from the
batch out of the total input quantity consumed. Output includes the main product,
co-products and by-product of yield type. Input includes the ingredients
contributing to the yield.
• Calculate the heat number for a batch: User can enter the heat number on a
production batch, which designates the heat batch, and the batches that consumed
the lots produced out of the heat would also carry the same heat number.
8.4.6. Release 12.2.7
8.4.6.1. Support for Resource Instance Update

New interface and a public API are provided to create the start/stop resource instance
level transactions, to update the instance of a planned transactions. User can update the
instance of a pending resource transactions using resource transactions window of batch
steps form or public API or interface.
8.4.7. Release 12.2.9
8.4.7.1. Support for Serialization

Regulatory controlled process industries are mandated to improve the supply chain
traceability with the visibility of the ingredients consumed or final products produced at a
serial unit level. Process execution is enhanced to support tracking and tracing of the
material issues and completions at a serial unit level.
Key Features:
• Capture Serial unit level Transactions: Process execution forms and public
apis are enhanced to support material issue and material completion transactions
at a serial unit level
• Support Serial Genealogy: Serial genealogy support is provided for the
production batches to track the ingredient serial units issued for a specific
production batch lots and serials.
8.4.8. Release 12.2.10
8.4.8.1. MSCA transactions for Serial Controlled Items

MSCA pages, Ingredient Issue, Ingredient Return, Product Completion, Product Return
and Incremental Backflush are enhanced to support the serial controlled and serial tagged
items to transact the serials.
8.4.8.2. Track Consumed Ingredient Lot/Serials for Product Lot/Serials in a
Batch
User can map the specific ingredient lots/serials consumed to a specific product lot/serial
by using Map Lots/Serials UI. User can view the genealogy of a product lot to expand on
the specific ingredient lots consumed while the batch gives the details of all the
ingredient lots consumed for all the product lots in the batch.
8.4.8.3. Create Batches based on Customer Specific Recipes

Based on the make to order rule parameter, Recipe Usage, Make to Order program
creates production batches based on the recipes defined specific to the customers of the
sales orders.
8.4.9. Release 12.2.11
8.4.9.1. Automatic Mapping of Ingredient Lot/Serials to Product Lot/Serials

System would automatically map the ingredient lots/serials consumed to specific product
lots/serials based on the step material association and step dependencies setup or based
on the transaction date sequence of the consumption and yield transactions.
8.4.9.1. Ingredient Substitution based on Availability

You can setup the substitute items for any ingredient that can be substituted during batch
creation or later if the original item is not available to transact. The most preferred and
available item is substituted when the original item is not available to transact and the
original item gets substituted when it is back in stock upon running the item substitution
program.
8.4.9.1. Create Rework Batches

You can create rework batches to rework the product from a previous batch where the
product was yielded while the previous batch was in WIP or Complete or Closed statuses.
You can add extra material or routing steps that are required for the rework process. The
ingredient of the rework batch would now get costed based on the prior period than the
prior iteration cost to avoid circular reference.
8.4.10. Release 12.2.12
8.4.10.1. Automatic Step Release upon Batch Release

System would automatically release the first step or all the steps upon batch release based
on the configuration of process execution parameter, “Automatic Step Release”. By
default, system does not release any step.
8.4.10.2. Automatic Update of Reservations and Material Quantities upon Scaling

System would automatically create new detail level reservations for the increased
quantity of material as a result of batch scale up or manual update of material plan or
WIP plan quantities. It would also adjust the existing reservations for the decreased
quantity of material as a result of batch scale down or manual update of material plan or
WIP plan quantities. This functionality is enabled through a new process execution
parameter, “Scale Reservations”.
8.4.10.3. Cancel Pending Steps in a Pending or WIP Batch
You can cancel a step with status “Pending” if the batch status is in Pending or WIP. The
new cancel action deletes the association of material with the cancelled step and deletes
any dependencies with other steps.
8.4.10.4. Generate OSP Shipment Lines and Print Shipping Documents

When Outside Processing Step is released, system would automatically create shipment
lines for the ingredients associated to it. When the intermediate material is transferred to
the OSP step from another step using the Step Transfer transaction, system would
automatically create the shipment lines for the quantities transferred.
Production user can manage the generated shipment lines using the new UI, “OSP
Shipment Lines” to make modifications to the automatically created shipment lines or to
create new shipment lines.
Shipping user can ship Intermediates and Ingredients to the OSP supplier from the
Shipping Transactions and generate the required shipping documents like Packing Slip
report, Bill of Lading report, Commercial Invoice report and Vehicle Load Sheet Details
report. Packing Slip report contains the information related to the OSP item, ingredient
items and purchase order.
8.4.11. Release 12.2.13
8.4.11.1. Ability to map an ingredient lot / serial to product lot / serial using API
The Lot Serial Genealogy API can be used to map lot / serial genealogy between Product
and Ingredient when the batch is in WIP, Completed or Closed status.
The API supports the following transactions
• Map an ingredient lot to product lot
• Modify ingredient lot and product lot mapping
• Map an ingredient serial to product serial
• Modify ingredient serial and product serial mapping

Oracle Inventory

No update in R12.
8.4.14. Terminology
Reservation A link between a source of supply and a source of demand. A
reservation guarantees availability of material to the demand.
Move Order A document that controls the planned and actual movement of
material from one location to another.
Make to Order (MTO) An industry term describing the process of manufacturing
products to supply customer orders.
8.5. Oracle Process Manufacturing Command Center
8.5.1. Overview
The Oracle Process Manufacturing Command Center provides dashboards empowering
production supervisors and quality managers with actionable insights that help manage
the production operations run efficiently to meet the customer commitments and resolve
the production quality issues.
The Oracle Process Manufacturing Command Center feature is available at no additional
cost to licensed users of Oracle Process Manufacturing. It can be applied to Release
12.2.4 and above.
8.5.2. Release 12.2.8+
Release 12.2 V2
8.5.2.1. Batch Status Dashboard

The Batch Status dashboard gives production supervisors a 360-degree overview of the
current production batches highlighting the status of batch schedules and exceptions
related to delays in schedules, material allocation issues, and expiring lots. The
production supervisors navigate through the information quickly, drill into a specific
production batch, and take an action to resolve the exceptions by batch updates.
8.5.2.2. Production Quality Dashboard

The Production Quality dashboard provides production supervisors and quality managers
with an overview of the production quality status for the completed batches as well as
that are in process. The dashboard highlights the sample acceptance and exceptions
related to quality sample rejections and nonconformances. The information is presented
through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable production supervisors and
quality managers navigate through the information quickly to narrow down on the
production batches with quality issues and related reasons like, for example, out of range
process parameters.
8.5.3. Release 12.2.9+
Release 12.2 V3
8.5.3.1. Enhancements to Batch Status and Production Quality Metrics

The metrics are formatted with different colors based on the metric is informational or
alert.
8.5.3.2. Enhancements to Refinements of Batch Status and Production Quality

Dashboards
The refinements are allowed with wildcard search for all the attributes in the available
refinements of the Batch Status and Production Quality dashboard.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Command Center 121
8.5.3.3. Enhancements to Results Table
The Attribute groups are provided with the default sort criteria in the results table of the
Batch Status and Production Quality dashboards. Also, the expiring lot details table is
added with the Batch scheduled start date attribute.
8.5.4. Release 12.2.9++

Release 12.2 V4
8.5.4.1. Descriptive flex field search for the batch and related entities
Batch Status and Production Quality dashboards are enhanced to refine using descriptive
flex field attributes of batch and related entities. Also, these attributes are displayed in the
Results tables.
8.5.4.2. Support for saved search

8.5.4.3. Export the records in Results table to csv format

The results tables across dashboards provide an option to export the table data in a csv file
format.
8.5.4.4. Compare the records in Results table

The results tables across dashboards provide an option to compare records of the results
table using Compare action link.
8.5.5. Release 12.2.10

Release 12.2 V5
8.5.5.1. Outside Processing Dashboard

The Outside Processing Dashboard provides production supervisors and production
schedulers with an overview of the current outside processing operations highlighting the
status of outside processing operations related to delays in schedules, and supplier issues.
The information is presented through clickable metrics, charts, and results table to enable
production supervisors and production schedulers navigate through the information
quickly, drill into a specific production batch, and take an action to quickly resolve any
bottlenecks to meet on time delivery commitments.
8.5.6. Release 12.2.10+
Release 12.2 V6
8.5.6.1. Display Timestamp for the date attributes in all dashboards

Dashboards are enhanced to display accurate dates along with timestamp details.
8.5.6.2. Insight into Batch planned consumption of expiring lots
The Batch Status dashboard is enhanced to add new dimension, batch planned
consumption in the expiring lots chart so that you can compare the lot expiration period
with the planned consumption period.
8.5.6.3. Navigate to Reservations forms/OA page from the expiring lots table of
Batch Status dashboard
You can now navigate to Reservations form/OA page from the expiring lot details table
to update the reservation of the expiring lots.
8.5.6.4. Display Open Quantity to Receive for OSP operations in Outside

The Outside Processing dashboard is enhanced to display the quantity that is yet to
receive for ethe outside processing operations that are in progress. The quantity for each
OSP item across batches is aggregated and displayed in the grid format. Also buyer name
is added in the results table to view buyer information.
8.5.7. Release 12.2.11

Release 12.2 V7
8.5.7.1. Color Pinning for Batch Status and Sample Disposition Attributes in
Graphs
All the dashboards are enhanced to pin static colors for different batch statuses and
different sample dispositioned displayed across graphs.
8.5.7.2. Navigation to the Items dashboard and Sample Inspection/Sample

Analysis Dashboards
You can navigate to the Items dashboard of Inventory Command Center for the selected
item from the material tab of the results table. You can navigate to the Sample
Inspection/Sample Analysis dashboards of the Quality Command Center from the
production quality dashboard for the selected sample.
8.5.8. Release 12.2.11+

Release 12.2 V8
8.5.8.1. Genealogy & Trace Dashboard

The Genealogy & Trace dashboard provides product traceability and impact analysis
capabilities in a network diagram to visualize end-to-end supply chain and manufacturing
information comprising of purchase orders, material lots, process batches, production
serial units and sales orders. The information is presented in a network diagram with
clickable nodes to enable quality analyst and quality manager navigate through the
network quickly, trace the network forward and backward to track the source of material
lots consumed in specific production work orders and the customers to whom those
production units were/are being shipped, understand the broader impact of specific
material lot from its consumption pattern and drilldown to take action on the specific
material lot, serial unit, sales order etc.
8.5.8.2. Batch hold pop-up action in Batch Status dashboard
The Batch Status dashboard is enabled with quick pop-up action link to put a batch on
hold or release a batch from hold. This pop-up action refreshes the dashboard page and
updates the information with the changes instantly thus eliminating the need to navigate
to the Batch details forms to perform the same action.
8.5.8.3. Timeline Viewer component in Batch Status dashboard

The Batch Status dashboard is enabled with Timeline viewer in Batches and Steps results
table. It allows you to switch between the table and timeline viewer. In the Batches
results table, Timeline viewer displays the timeline of one or more batches by different
date attributes such as planned start date, planned completion date and actual start date.
Similarly, in the Steps results table, Timeline viewer displays timeline of one or more
steps by date attributes such as planned start date, planned completion date and actual
start date. Also action links are enabled on the Timeline viewer nodes for more actions.
8.5.8.4. Navigate from Batch Status dashboard to Genealogy & Trace dashboard
Navigate from the Batch Status dashboard to Genealogy & Trace dashboard to view the
genealogy of one or more batches selected.
8.5.9. Release 12.2.12+

Release 12.2 V10.
8.5.9.1. Reorganization of metrics in Batch Status dashboard

In Batch Status dashboard, new metrics are added grouped under three tabs. The metric
tabs are
- Status tab comprising Pending, WIP and Recently Canceled metric
- Progress tab comprising Staring Today, Finishing Today, On Track, Start
Delayed, Started Late, Completion Delayed and On Hold metrics
- Exceptions tab comprising Unallocated and Batches having expiring lots metrics
The reorganization of the metric helps to focus and execute the batches as per the
manufacturing need.
8.5.9.2. Organization and Date Range parameters in the Data Load programs
The data load concurrent programs support loading data for one or more plants
(Organizations) at a time and for a given time range using Full & Sequential data loading.
It allows user to select an organization in the concurrent program and load the data for the
specific organization. It provides configurable time fence days (profile option) for In
Progress/Open batches for data extraction from EBS to ingest into ECC. User will be able
to load data for specific organization quickly for a given time fence days and then view
the information in dashboards.
8.5.9.3. Quick Batch actions in Batch Status dashboard

The Batch Status dashboard is enabled with quick batch actions via pop-ups for:
- Release
- Batch Hold / Release
- Batch complete
- Batch Reschedule
- Batch Cancel
These batch actions refreshes the dashboard page and updates the information with the
changes instantly thus eliminating the need to navigate to the Batch details forms to
perform the same action.
8.5.9.4. Display additional attribute group in result table for batches on hold
Attributes pertaining to Batch on hold have been grouped together as “Batch Hold
Details” and are displayed as a separate attribute group in the result table.
8.5.9.5. Results table column values color badging

The results tables are enhanced to display Batch and Step Status in specific color badges.
8.5.10. Release 12.2.13

Release 12.2 V11.
8.5.10.1. Reorganization of metrics in Batch Status dashboard

In Batch Status dashboard, new metrics are added grouped under four tabs. The metric
tabs are
• Batch Status tab comprising Pending, WIP, Recently Completed, Recently
Closed and Recently Canceled metrics
• Schedule tab comprising Staring Today, Finishing Today, Start Delayed, Started
Late and Completion Delayed metrics
• Progress tab comprising On Track and On Hold metrics
• Exceptions tab comprising Unallocated, With expiring lots, Recently Terminated,
Recently Under Rework, Original Batch Requiring Rework metrics
The reorganization of the metric helps to focus and execute the batches as per the
manufacturing need.
8.6. Oracle Process Manufacturing Information Discovery

8.6.1. Overview
In process industries, variability of ingredients and processes are a common issue. Oracle
E-Business Suite Process Manufacturing Information Discovery empowers
manufacturing supervisor managers, supply chain analysts and business users with the
ability to find these issues which hamper productivity and resolve them.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Information Discovery 125
Key Features:
values in key attributes like Expiring Lots, Batches, Ingredients, Steps, Resources
and Sales are displayed
• 360 degree view of Batches and Expiring Lots: Supervisors can quickly
monitor the impact of the delayed batches and quality issues on a color-coded
dashboard.
• Batch Yield: Quickly identify the jobs and customers with low yield actual to
plan to take remedial actions and improve productions efficiency.
• Unallocated Ingredients: Gain immediate visibility into batches that require lot
assignments on the shop floor
• Expiring Lots: Easily identify lots that are about to expire and extended their
shelf-life proactively
• Quality Results: View sample results across plants/organizations for products
and ingredients.
Applications
8.6.2.1. Oracle Cost Management Information Discovery

Oracle OPM Cost Management Information Discovery allows users to discover
transactions and related accounting information in real time thereby providing
opportunity to effectively manage the period close process, reconcile accounting as well
as ensure accuracy of accounting across sub ledgers. There are two intuitive user-
interfaces – the Period Health Check helps to discover transactions that are either
preventing or delaying period close or the Transaction Accounting Register assists in
reconciliation of accounting for all supply chain subledgers.
Period Health Check
Transaction Accounting Register
Key Features:
values in key attributes like Organization, Transaction, Batch Receiving,
Maintenance, and Transfers are displayed for Period Health Check. For
Transaction Accounting Register the attributes include Organization, Job,
Account, Transaction, Receiving and Write-off
• 360-degree view of Pending Transactions and Incomplete Account Entries:
Supervisors can quickly monitor the impact of the unprocessed material and
shipping, pending transactions and interfaces and incomplete batches on a color-
coded dashboard.
• Fully integrated with Oracle E-Business Suite: Fully integrated with OPM
Cost Management and honors the same Organization security configured in E-
Business suite at run time instantly.
8.6.3. V5
8.6.3.1. Oracle Process Manufacturing Laboratory Management Visibility

The OPM Quality pages provide the tools for quality managers and technicians to
monitor and improve efficiency of quality operations by having real-time information to
prioritize the samples to be tested, identify the lot expiry or retest samples and the trend
of the tests and sample dispositions from different sources. In addition, answers to
questions related to the quality of the material and process so that the non-conformance
of the material is identified and corrective action are taken.
Features include:
values in key attributes like test name, sample number, disposition are displayed
• Quality Metrics – Graphical display of sample status and load information so
that with a glance supervisors can assess productivity and production issues
• Corrective Actions – potential quality issues are highlighted in the tag cloud
region with font size indicating the frequency of occurrence
• Sample Insights - Quickly review sample dispositions, sample delays and test
expirations to proactively reassign tests to analyst for increase laboratory
productivity
8.6.4. V7
8.6.4.1. Batch Information Discovery Enhancements

The Batch Information discovery page is enhanced to include the metrics to display the
number of batches on hold, alert to show the batches that are put on hold and the result
table.
8.6.4.2. Quality Information Discovery Enhancements

The Quality Information discovery page is enhanced to include the information related to
the internal order samples in the available refinements, supplier insights and the result
table.
8.6.5. V8
8.6.5.1. Advanced Search and Wildcard Search Capabilities

The Batch Information discovery page and Quality Information Discovery pages are
enhanced to provide the Advanced search capabilities and Wildcard search capabilities.
• Partial search support for value search from both available refinements or type-
ahead suggestions
• Partial search support for record search
• Partial search support for record search with Boolean expression
• “Exclude All” capability per attribute on available refinements
• Fix for “Show More” broken functionality
• Change of behavior for “Select All” functionality (same as “Exclude All”)
8.6.5.2. Navigation from Batch Information Discovery to Item and Quality

Information Discovery Pages
Batch Information Discovery is enhanced to provide the navigation to the Item
Information Discovery on clicking an Item in the Material Details. The navigation to the
Quality Information Discovery is provided from Batch Information Discovery for a
specific batch so that the quality results can be reviewed.
8.7. Oracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite
Oracle is discontinuing Oracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-
Business Suite as of November 1, 2022. Oracle will support this app, but will not deliver
any new updates to the app.
• The app will remain on the Apple App Store and Google Play with the latest
client version delivered, as long as technically feasible. Apple and Google may
remove apps that no longer meet their technical requirements.
• The corresponding MAA file for the latest client version is available on the
Oracle Software Delivery Cloud.
• Oracle will continue to deliver REST services for selected functionality in this
app for use in custom app development.
request resolution. As of November 1, 2022, error correction support will no longer be
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content DocumentOracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite 129
8.7.2. Overview
With Oracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite, process
manufacturing supervisors can monitor batches and take quick actions on the go.
- Search batches and steps or barcode scan to view progress (on track, delayed,
exceptions, started late)
- View batches, steps, exceptions, and material details
- Perform quick actions like release, complete, reschedule, cancel, and email
- Manage production exceptions related to unallocated ingredients, expiring lots,
products, and by-products
Oracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-Business Suite is compatible
with Oracle E-Business Suite 12.1.3 and 12.2.3 and above. To use this app, you must be a
user of Oracle Process Manufacturing, with mobile services configured on the server side
by your administrator.


There are accessibility improvements in the Batches Tile page, Related Information


In previous versions, Oracle Mobile Process Production Supervisor for Oracle E-
Business Suite was available only for iOS devices. Starting with version 1.2.0, the app is
now available for Android devices as well.

8.7.5.2. Translation Support.



iOS devices
(MAF) 2.3.1

server
(MAF) 2.4.0

• For apps installed through an Enterprise Mobility Management (EMM) solution's
app catalog, support for having the EBS Server URL preconfigured by an
administrator rather than requiring users to enter it after launching the app
• Enhancement to prevent attachments viewed within the app from being shared
elsewhere on iOS devices
2.5.0

2.6.1
8.7.11.1. Uptake of Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF) 2.6.3
• Oracle E-Business Suite Mobile Foundation Release 9.1 implements Oracle

MAF 2.6.3.
8.8. Oracle Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Process Manufacturing

8.8.1. Features
The MES for Process Industries project takes a fresh look at how the manufacturing
process is executed, improves usability, fills functional gaps for process manufacturing
industries and provides the opportunity to eliminate significant amounts, if not all paper
from the manufacturing batch recordkeeping process. This has been accomplished with
the addition of the following features and new functionality.
8.8.1.1. Batch Journal

The Batch Journal for a batch is created at the time a batch is created. The Batch Journal
is instantiated with all the details of the batch such as Recipe details, Process Instructions,
SOPs, and quality sampling plans. Once this Batch Journal is created, a deferred
Electronic Signature event is created for the approval of the Batch Journal. This is the
equivalent of the Master Batch Record approval.
The following are the capabilities that are available out of the Batch Journal
functionality:
• It is available “On Demand” during Batch Execution and available as an
electronic record after batch closure.
• It is available to be viewed online or printed.
• It is available from the batch header at any point in the batch cycle.
The SOPs attached to the recipe, formula, or routing components are available in the
Batch Journal as hyperlinks.
Batch Journal contains all the major events (along with dates and names of people) that
have happened to the batch:
• Batch Creation
• Master Batch Record Approval
• Batch Release
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content DocumentOracle Manufacturing Execution System (MES) for Process Manufacturing 132
• Allocation
• Consumption details
• Material Yield details
• QC test results with an ability to drill down into the data
• Resource transactions
• Process parameter reporting
• Batch complete
• Batch cancel
• Batch Terminate
• Batch Reopen
• Electronic signatures recorded during the batch life cycle.
• Equipment used for the manufacturing process
• Information on each of the ingredients used, the lot numbers, quantity dispensed
and quantity used
• Yield information
• Identification of the persons performing and directly supervising or checking
each significant step in the operation
• Details of all critical and non-critical deviations recorded
• Evidence of acknowledgement from the operator that he/she followed the process
exactly as per the SOP
• Electronic copies of all labels generated during batch execution and QC.
The batch journal is the complete record of the lifecycle of the production batch. Ideally,
it will replace the paper batch record, even in FDA-regulated industries.
8.8.1.2. Dispensing and Preweigh

Dispensing is a key requirement for many process manufacturers. Dispensing of the right
materials to the right batches prior to the manufacturing process is a key activity. This
process is especially critical when working with the active ingredients (APIs) in a drug,
chemical, food and beverage product formulation.
The formulation process requires right materials to be allocated with specific quality
parameters and in right quantities. Since the quantities that would be formulated may run
into decimals, the accuracy of weights is very critical. To enable this dispensing functions
have been integrated with weigh scales. Additionally, functionally to manage cleaning of
dispensing booths has been provided.
8.8.1.3. Label Management

Labels will be printable throughout the dispensing and manufacturing process.
8.8.1.4. Deviation Management

Deviation management is a key component for an electronic records system. The various
types of deviations that need to recorded are:
• Deviations from quantity consumed/yielded
• Deviations from specifications set for process parameters
• Item substitutions
• Resource substitutions
• User Defined Events
Users can classify deviations as either Critical or Non-Critical. The user also can specify
the actions that need to be taken after a deviation is recorded. For example, critical
deviations need to be signed off by a QC Manager while the Production Supervisor can
sign off Non Critical deviations.
Critical deviations must be approved prior to closure of the batch and prior to material
disposition. If additional follow-up and analysis documentation is created, it is associated
with the batch and be incorporated into the batch journal. Also, the users can view any
Standard Operating Procedures that are linked to this type of deviation.
In order to capture deviations of quantities consumed/yielded, it is necessary to define
tolerances for items. These tolerances can be defined at various levels – Inventory
Organization, Item, Recipe/Formula and Recipe/Formula line item level.
8.8.1.5. Simplified Production Reporting

A new user interface has been provided to greatly simplify the batch process for operators
on the shop floor, while providing more direction to the operators to follow the best
practices defined in the recipe. In the past where operators were presented with a wide
array of screens, which had to be navigated in order to enter batch information, now
operators are able to very quickly and efficiently focus in on the tasks that are awaiting
their attention, and the system will lead them through those tasks. All along processing
instructions are up-to-date SOPs are at the operators’ fingertips.
8.8.1.6. Improved Processing Instruction and SOP Visibility

A new production process-oriented approach has been taken with this product. Rather
than managing production from a materials first perspective, OPM MES is designed with
the operator on the shop floor in mind. Processing instructions capability has been vastly
improved from the definition and execution standpoints.
When defining processing instructions, you may now associate actions to each
instruction. This combination of process instruction text and specific actions guide the
operator through the pre-defined process that they need to follow, as defined in the
recipe. Additionally, you may embed links to standard operating procedures (SOPs) in
the processing instructions. SOPs are typically used to describe broader procedural sets
that may be used beyond a particular recipe. For instance, the steps involved in cleaning a
particular model of equipment.
From the operator standpoint, the processing instructions are now prominently displayed
when a batch is processed. The processing instructions are intended to lead the operator
through the batch process, by documenting the proper things to do, where and when they
need to do them.
8.8.1.7. Operator Certification

Per 21 CFR Parts 211.25 and 820.25, the users involved in manufacturing and testing
activities in FDA-regulated industries need to be adequately trained to ensure product
quality.
To address these requirements, the following are the capabilities have been added:
• Based on the training records available, a training matrix may be created which
has information on which operator is trained on which resource and materials.
• Whenever an operator enters his/her signature, the system would validate that the
user is indeed trained and hence authorized to operate the resource.
8.8.1.8. Simplified Electronic Signatures / Initialing
The Oracle E-Records signing process now offers a simplified and streamlined signing
process for signature capture on very specific events, such as entry of a dispensing
weight, lot allocation and in-process deviation capture. These are transactions in which
the information that the signer is attesting to is right on the screen that they are on, so the
content of what they are signing is very clear.
8.8.2. Overview
Oracle is closing the gap between traditional Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) and
Manufacturing Execution Systems (MES) for process manufacturers by adding a new
product to the process manufacturing product suite. Oracle MES for Process Industries
adds new production batch execution functionality and increases usability for
manufacturing operators, enabling fully paperless batch recordkeeping and adding
support for dispensing and pre-weigh operations. Traditionally, manufacturers had to
invest in building and maintaining costly interfaces between ERP, which held financial,
human resources, inventory, sales, purchasing and master recipe data and MES, which
manages the actual execution activities of the production batches on the shop floor.
Oracle is building deeper native MES capabilities into its applications so that costs, data
replication and risk of errors will be reduced, while data accuracy, process repeatability
and information visibility will be improved by managing all information in a single, real-
time database.
This product is designed for use in many process industry plants, especially those that are
looking to move to electronic batch recordkeeping and those that previously might have
opted to purchase a third-party MES. It offers the advantage of providing true enterprise-
wide information from the shop floor to the boardroom.
8.8.3. Terminology
Term Definition
SOP Standard Operating Procedure

CFR Code of Federal Regulations
FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
8.8.4. Release 12.0.2 (RUP2)
8.8.4.1. Touch Screen User Interface

Oracle MES for Process Manufacturing brings shop floor execution closer to the
operators with the introduction of touch screen user interface in areas such as,
Operator Workbench (Material Transactions, Resource Transactions, Process
Parameters), Dispensing, and Reverse Dispensing. Each screen has been updated
with an intuitive, easy-to-use user interface, providing near real-time data capture at
the shop floor to facilitate compliance and improve productivity.
8.8.4.2. Dispensing Area

Dispensing Area is a new entity that represents the physical area in a warehouse
where the Dispensing activity is carried out. Dispensing Area is linked to
Subinventory which helps in tracking inventory movement for Dispensing, Resource
Usage, and Operator Access in a specific area. Additionally, the Dispensing Area
can be divided into smaller rooms called Dispensing Booths which are the specific
locations for Dispensing activity. Each Dispensing Booth can be monitored for
environmental conditions such as humidity and air quality.
8.8.4.3. Dispense Planning
Dispense Planning is a new workbench for supervisors to plan all dispensing
activities. Similar activities can be grouped together for planning a Dispense
Campaign, as well as assigning priority and resources for Dispensing. The Gantt
chart user interface displays resource overload, helping supervisors to better manage
their resources.
8.8.4.4. Operator Certification

Operator Certification satisfies the regulatory requirement of FDA 21 CFR Part
211.25 for Personnel Qualification. It enables a corporation to identify the required
skills and training needs, as well as certification approvals, for an operator to perform
production activities. Operator Certification is seamlessly integrated with Oracle
HRMS for all needs related to skills definition, training needs, and certification.
8.8.4.5. Least Cost Formulation Batches

This feature was introduced in the New Product Development module in Process
Manufacturing R12 and is now supported by MES for Process Manufacturing. A
user can now formulate to target product specifications and leverage this formula in
MES.
8.8.5. Release 12.2.8
8.8.5.1. Quality Inspection using Touch Screen User Interface

Production users can create new quality samples and can enter results for a wip
sample using Touch Screen user interface by enabling the new tasks, Quality Touch
Screen Sample and Quality Touch Screen Result.
8.8.5.2. Formula Security in MES Dispensing

Dispending users of MES can view the formulas and batch details based on the user
access level defined as per the formula security parameters of the Product
Development security profile.
8.8.5.3. Support Include Tare in Dispensing Touch Screen Preferences

Dispensing users of MES can set a preference to include or exclude tare which can
act like a default option for every dispensing transaction.
8.8.5.4. Show Lot Attributes in Dispensing Touch Screen

Dispensing touch screen UI display the additional lot attributes, lot status, lot expiry
date and lot retest date enabling them to take a decision on the dispensing of the lot.
8.8.5.5. Support for Label Printing

Dispensing users of MES can select a label printer and the number of copies as part
of the existing label print functionality.
8.8.6. Release 12.2.9
8.8.6.1. Support for Batch Specific Process Instructions

MES for Process Manufacturing Administrators can create batch specific process
instructions that are different from the standard process instructions created in the
recipe. Administrators can also update and delete the existing instructions and create
an instruction set if there is no instruction set existing.
8.8.7. Release 12.2.10
8.8.7.1. Support for capturing of multiple readings for a process parameter

MES Operators can enter multiple process parameter readings while executing the
process instructions with the task type as process parameter. As per the aggregate
functions defined in the process parameter definition, all the values of the process
parameter readings are aggregated, stored and displayed in the process execution
process parameters and also in the control batch record.
8.8.7.2. Support for Serial Controlled/Serial-Tagged Item transactions

MES Operators can transact the serial-controlled/serial-tagged ingredients and
products by entering WIP Issue or WIP Completion transaction in MES touch screen
and non-touch screen interfaces.
8.8.8. Release 12.2.11
8.8.8.1. Support for Adhoc Label Printing

MES for Process Manufacturing Administrators can now print the labels of the material
on adhoc basis post the transaction for the business flows, Process Dispensing, Process
Product and Process Sample. This would help in reprinting the labels in cases such as
missing labels or spoilt labels.
8.8.8.1. E-Signatures for execution of Optional and Mandatory-Able-To-Proceed

type of process instructions
You can setup the Signers for the optional or mandatory-able-to-proceed type of process
instructions and electronically sign the execution of those instructions.
8.8.8.1. Support for Additional Attributes and Attachments for Process

Instructions
You can define additional custom attributes such as room temperature, humidity or
previous product and associate to the process instructions so that you can capture the
values of these attributes during execution of process instructions. You can also attach
files using standard upload attachment pages integrated to the execution of instructions.
8.8.8.1. Material Loss during Dispensing Process

Dispensing process flow with source container or target container modes allows you to
capture the material loss during the transfer of ingredient material from source to target
containers and record the loss quantity as miscellaneous issue transaction.
8.8.9. Release 12.2.12
8.8.9.1. Support for Clearance Instructions

According to the Good Manufacturing Practices, the regulatory controlled manufacturers
require to ensure the cleanliness of the manufacturing area to prevent mix up and
contamination of the products. To achieve this, system enables MES for Process
Manufacturing Administrators to setup Instructions of type, Clearance for a recipe or a
dispense area. Batch/Batch step cannot be released until the completion of the clearance
instructions associated to the entity. Similarly, dispensing of the material is not allowed
until the completion of the clearance instructions associated to the dispense area.
8.8.9.1. Automatic Material Transaction upon Dispensing
In the business scenario where ingredient material is issued to the batch as part of the
dispensing flow, dispensing supervisors can enable “Material Transaction” in the
dispensing setup that automatically creates WIP issue transaction for the dispensed
quantity. Similarly, system would automate the WIP return transaction upon the reverse
dispensing.
8.8.9.1. Flexible Device Integration Mode for Dispensing Scales

In the business scenario where some of the ingredients dispensed require tight integration
with devices while others require no integration with scales, dispensing supervisors can
setup the device integration mode specific to the recipe and item combination. Based on
this setup, dispensed quantities can either be read automatically from the scales or can be
entered manually or both.
8.8.10. Release 12.2.13
8.8.10.1. Log nonconformances from MES workbench and touchscreen interface

Unexpected events that adversely affect the manufacturing process and quality of the
finished product can occur in any controlled production environment. These
nonconformances must be recorded so that quality departments can analyze
nonconformances as part of their corrective action and preventive action initiatives.
User can capture nonconformances observed during the manufacturing events from MES
workbench and touchscreen interface and use them for analysis by Quality Control for
Corrective Action, Preventive Action (CAPA).
8.9. Process Manufacturing Planning

8.9.1. Overview
The Process Inventory and Oracle Inventory applications are converged into a single
system that is used to manage inventory across the entire Oracle E-Business Suite
seamlessly, regardless of the type of manufacturing that a business employs. Process
features will be added to Oracle Inventory to support Process characteristics, such as dual
units of measure, grade, child lots as a subdivision of lot-controlled inventory, and the
use of material status.
As a result, OPM MRP will not be brought forward and all planning with OPM will
utilize Oracle’s Advanced Planning and Scheduling (APS) in an unconstrained manner
with enhancements to use Oracle Inventory.
8.9.2. Features
8.9.2.1. Integration of Production Batches

The integration of OPM and ASCP brought production batch data to APS through the
collection process. This data encompassed inventory transactions, material and resource
usage, and organizations (OPM Plants). All the current pulls of data are now changed to
reflect Oracle Inventory instead of OPM Inventory. The OPM organization now
leverages the Oracle organization structure, as the OPM organization and plants will be
discontinued. The OPM Shop Calendar, which is used in the creation and rescheduling
of batches, will be replaced by the Oracle Work Day Calendar.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Process Manufacturing Planning 138
8.9.2.2. Integration of Recipes
The integration to APS brings the OPM Recipes to ASCP through the collection,
enabling planning to suggest production based on these recipes. With the change in the
organization structure recipes and resources reflect the new organizations to enable
planning to project resource loads and production batches against the correct entities.
8.9.2.3. Integration of Inventory

Prior to R12, inventory transactions go against OPM inventory tables. This includes lots,
statuses, locations, etc. The convergence of OPM inventory into Oracle inventory results
in all inventory pulls going to APS to be remapped to now use Oracle inventory. Data
pulls from OPM inventory are stopped.
8.9.2.4. Item Cost

Item cost information is used in ASCP when running an optimized plan to maximize plan
profit. The OPM item cost information will still be maintained in OPM but the
organization structure changes will be reflected.
8.9.2.5. Shop Calendar

The OPM Shop Calendar is used with ASCP when scheduling production batches. The
calendar defines work and non-working days and shifts for the production plant. ASCP
schedules production batches accordingly during working days and shifts. Oracle
inventory also has a calendar called the Work Day Calendar. The “OPM Shop” Calendar
will be replaced by the “Oracle Work Day” Calendar. ASCP will then use the “Work
Day” Calendar when scheduling OPM production batches.
8.9.2.6. Forecast
The OPM Forecast will be replaced by using the existing discrete forecast forms. This
will provide OPM users with greater flexibility along with the use of API’s to load a
forecast into OPM. Not all users will need or want to use Demand Planning and the use
of the discrete forecast provides users with a basic tool.
8.9.2.7. Item Substitution Effectivity Date Support

The Item Substitution feature in OPM is being incorporated into the Formula Change
Request implemented in 11i.10. The ingredients associated to a formula will be able to
be substituted based on a valid list and associated effective dates as to when the substitute
ingredient is valid. Advanced Supply Chain Planning (ASCP) has current logic to use
substitute ingredients (components). The collection process will now pass these valid
substitute ingredients and dates to ASCP for effective planning. Planning will
recommend batches based on formula changes that will be effective at the Planned Start
Date of the Batch.
8.9.2.8. Firming Feedback from ASCP to OPM

The planner must be able to firm a “Planned Suggestion” in the ASCP workbench and
this suggestion will be implemented as “Firm” in OPM. OPM production batch has a
firm flag and this flag needs to be updated by a “Firmed” suggestion from ASCP. OPM
currently enables the user to manually update the firm flag on a batch in this way ASCP
will not replan the batch. This firm flag also must be automatically updated from the
ASCP when a suggestion is implemented and the batch created in OPM.
Advanced Supply Chain Planning (ASCP) suggests planned production orders when
using OPM. These suggestions can be “firmed” by the user and when the suggestion is
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Process Manufacturing Planning 139
implemented in OPM (batch creation) the batch will automatically firmed. ASCP will
not reschedule a firmed batch.
8.9.3. Release 12.1.1
8.9.3.1. Resource Batching

Manufacturers must be able to ensure full utilization and efficient use of their resources.
In order to do that, they must be able to gather multiple production batches being
processed from upstream operations, and load them together into the same piece of
equipment to be processed concurrently.
OPM Planning has been enhanced to take advantage of the Resource Batching
functionality that is available in Production Scheduler and Advanced Supply Chain
Planning. A user will be able to go to the Plant Resource form, explicitly define a given
resource as batchable, and define a minimum and maximum spot capacity and a pull
forward window. Within Production Scheduler, a user can specify attributes values (such
as Temperature, Color, Duration etc) which can be used to group products/batches
together for processing. Production Scheduler and ASCP can then plan and schedule
multiple batches in a batchable resource simultaneously.
• OPM Process Execution
• OPM New Product Development
• OPM Cost Management
• Oracle Advanced Planning and Scheduling
8.9.5. Terminology
Term Definition
API Application Programming Interface

Batchable Resource A machine / oven / kiln (or similar) that can process many
items simultaneously, providing they share 1 or more similar
attributes (such as Temperature, Color, Duration etc).
8.10. OPM System Administration – Inventory Convergence Migration

8.10.1. Overview
In order to support a common organization and inventory model, the Process
Manufacturing development team has ensured that the fundamental data defined to run
your business is carried forward into the new tables, and transformed where necessary to
reflect data model changes. Migration and data transformation scripts will be provided
for this purpose and run in different phases in order to have a minimal impact on
performance.
Many of the OPM System Administration functions will become obsolete as equivalent
functions already exist elsewhere in Oracle Applications.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document OPM System Administration – Inventory Convergence Migration 140
8.10.2. Features
8.10.2.1. Convergence Migration

Organization Migration
Migrating the organization structure touches the areas of OPM Financials, OPM System
Administration and OPM Inventory. The elimination of the OPM organization means
that the following will be migrated:
• OPM Company and Fiscal Policy will be validated against the operating unit, set
of books and legal entity definitions
• OPM Organizations, which are not companies, will be created as Inventory
Organizations. Any organization which will not be migrated would be “marked
for delete” in OPM.
• OPM Warehouses, which are already created as Inventory Organizations, can
remain at that level or be moved down to a Subinventory. The user needs to
choose which warehouses will become subinventories and the inventory
organization under which they fall.
• All re-mapping of organizations will be effective with transactions going forward
and will have no impact on historical data.
Item Master
In the current OPM Inventory application, an item created in OPM is also inserted, via a
database trigger, into the Oracle Inventory item master. Additionally, item categories are
used to group OPM items, so there would be no migration issues with respect to item
categories.
Since most of the item and item category information resides in Discrete Inventory, the
migration of the item master consists of:
• Validating and synchronizing the item definition between Discrete and Process
• Validating the assignment of items into item categories
• Validating the assignment of items to organizations (both Process-Enabled and
Discrete organizations)
OPM Inventory
All of the OPM Inventory features will be migrated to their equivalent features in Oracle
Inventory. Here is a list:
• Inventory Balances
• Lots & Sublots
• Lot Allocation parameters
• Lot/Sublot Conversions
• Inventory Journals
• Inventory Creates, Adjustments, Movements, Status & Grade changes
• Lot Status Codes
• Period Balances
• Inventory Calendar
• Lot Genealogy
Physical Inventory/Cycle Counting
ABC Codes and related setup will be migrated, and the physical inventory transactions
are part of the completed transaction table which will not be migrated.
OPM Product Development
Product Development will not be migrated, but needs to be compatible with the new
definitions for organizations, items, and user-organization security. Objects affected are:
• Formulas
• Recipes
• Routings
• Operations
• Technical Data
• Simulation and Analysis Tools
Regulatory Management
Regulatory items will be migrated to the item master, and regulatory item properties will
also be migrated. Regulatory formulas will be migrated to the Formula tables in GMD.
Process Execution
Open batches in Process Execution will be migrated. This migration will occur by
closing the existing batch and recreating as a last step of migration with updated
inventory transactions. The old batch will no longer be updateable.
Quality Management
Most of Quality Management will not be migrated, although many updates will be made
within the data model to ensure compatibility with items, organizations, and inventory
transactions.
However, the following entities within QM will be migrated:
• Grades
• Actions
• Hold Reason Codes
Purchasing
Minimal changes are expected here for OPM customers using Oracle Purchasing. Lot
numbers will be updated to reflect the migration to the new Lot tables.
Planning
A few setup tables will need to be updated to deal with the new item master and
organizations tables, however Planning is already integrated to ASCP so no migration is
necessary.
Costing
Several tables within OPM Costing will be migrated to the new Subledger Architecture
(SLA). These include: Account Mappings, Event Codes, Sub Events and the Subsidiary
Ledger. However, other entities will remain in OPM Costing and will require a data
transformation to reflect the changes to items and organizations.
Manufacturing Accounting Controller
Manufacturing Accounting Controller will be replaced by SLA.
8.10.2.2. OPM System Administration

Many of the OPM System Administration functions will become obsolete as equivalent
functions already exist elsewhere in Oracle Applications. Aside from Organizations
which is discussed earlier in the document, the features that will be migrated are:
• Reason Codes and Reason Code Security (to Inventory Reasons)
• User Organizations (to Organization Access)
• Geography Codes (to Territory and AR Locations)
• Addresses (to HR Locations)
Support will be continued within OPM System Administration for the following
functions:
• Document Types and Document Ordering – most of these will become obsolete
except for those documents used by Process Execution and Quality Management
• Paragraphs
• Text Tokens
• Purge and Archive
• Workflow Setups
8.10.3. Release 12.2.11
8.10.3.1. Purge and Archive of Batch Transactional data

You can purge and archive the data periodically in your production environment as per
the data retention requirements set by the regulatory authorities. You can archive or purge
the data related to the production batches and its related entities like steps, activities,
resource, materials and quality results that are no longer required.
8.10.4. Release 12.2.13
8.10.4.1. Purge and Archive of Quality transactions

You can archive or purge data related to the Quality transactions and its related entities
that are no longer required.
8.11. Oracle Process Manufacturing Logistics

8.11.1. Overview
Oracle Process Manufacturing Logistics is an extension of Oracle Order Management
and Oracle Purchasing that supports the needs of process manufacturers in the customer
fulfillment and procurement applications. Unique requirements for food and beverage,
pharmaceutical, chemical and other process manufacturers include:
• The ability to order, price, ship and receive in two units of measure
• Allocating inventory based on customer specifications and preferences
• Capturing additional acquisition costs, such as freight and special charges, as part
of your purchased material
• Optionally capturing electronic signatures and records
Process Logistics integrates with the Process Execution (manufacturing) and Process
Costing applications, along with the rest of the e-Business Suite, to provide a complete
solution for customer service and procurement.
The Process Inventory and Oracle Inventory applications are now a single application for
managing inventory across the entire Oracle e-Business Suite. Process features have
been added to Oracle Inventory to support Process characteristics, such as dual units of
measure, grade, child lots as a subdivision of lot-controlled inventory, and the use of
material status.
As a result, the integration between Process Inventory and Oracle Order Management has
been removed and the single inventory application, Oracle Inventory, is the one source of
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Logistics 143
all material management information. Key areas that have been enhanced for Order
Management include improved allocation (picking) rules and added features to Move
Orders. Additionally, the ability to price by a secondary quantity is available to all users
who track their inventory in two quantities. Process users can leverage all of the
functionality in Order Management, such as enhanced scheduling and reservations, and
international drop shipments, as well as Warehouse Management System functions.
8.11.2. Features
8.11.2.1. Converged Inventory Modifications to Order Management

Since Order Management and Shipping Execution integrated to Process Inventory for
inventory organizations that were flagged as “process-enabled”, this integration is
removed and replaced with similar logic now included in Oracle Inventory. Specifically,
the following areas are modified:
• Item entry and order quantity validation – All items are validated against the central
item master in Oracle Inventory. Items can now be defined as “dual unit of measure
controlled” and the logic to determine a required secondary quantity are based on the
settings in the Oracle Inventory item master. Similarly, lot control, grade control and
status control are established here and the corresponding settings are used throughout
Order Management and Shipping Execution.
• Reservations – Process Manufacturing users can leverage all reservation functionality
available to Order Management users. This includes fair share and percentage
reservations, reserving material at a detailed or high level, and enhanced reservations.
Enhanced reservations is a new feature for this release that enables the user match
any demand to any supply. Thus, a sales order can be reserved against a purchase
order or Process Execution batch. The reservation is then converted into an
allocation when the purchase order is received or the batch is completed.
• Pricing – An item can be tracked in two units of measure and priced in either unit.
The new column in the item master for Pricing determines the quantity on which the
price will be based. For items that are tracked in two quantities, the price can be
computed on either the primary or secondary order and shipped quantities. When
inventory is tracked in only one unit, but priced in a secondary unit, then the price is
computed when the shipped quantity is entered through the mobile transactions. This
feature of pricing by secondary quantity, without tracking the inventory in that
quantity, is known as catch weight pricing and is only available when Warehouse
Management is implemented with Order Management.
• Picking – All picking logic and picking rules are maintained through Oracle
Inventory. Picking rules in Oracle Inventory are enhanced to incorporate
functionality from Process Inventory (see the RCD for Process Inventory).
Additionally, the Oracle Warehouse Management application has a picking engine
that can be set up for more sophisticated picking logic. For both types of rules,
Process Manufacturing users can select to match on customer specifications
maintained in Process Quality. Move orders in Oracle Inventory facilitate the
movement of material to the staging location for shipping.
• Shipping – For items tracked in two units, the shipped quantities are maintained for
both units. License Plate Numbers and the packing functionality support the process
features of dual quantities, lot-controlled material and indivisible lots. When a lot is
indivisible, it will not be split between containers.
• Material status and grade – Material status and grade have been migrated to Oracle
Inventory. Status is used when determining if inventory can be picked or shipped.
The preferred grade from the sales order line can be used to pick the correct
inventory.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Process Manufacturing Logistics 144
8.11.2.2. Move Orders enhanced to display Available Inventory
Move orders in Oracle Inventory are a request to move inventory within a facility. As
part of the movement, inventory is allocated to the move order request. In Process
Inventory, the move order allowed you to view available inventory and modify the
allocation. In Oracle Inventory, prior to this release, a view of available inventory did not
exist.
The new view shows inventory available in the inventory organization, based on onhand
balances, reserved and allocated inventory, quality grade, lot expiration dates and
material status. The view is accessed through the View/Update Allocations window from
Move Orders.
8.11.2.3. Automatic creation of a batch for a sales order line

In a make-to-order environment, users do not satisfy demand through on-hand inventory,
but must schedule production to fulfill a customer order. A Process Manufacturing
production batch can be created from a sales order based on rules you establish for the
item and/or customer. A batch is automatically created using information from the sales
order line and recipes you maintain in Process Product Development. Once the batch is
created, it is reserved for the sales order and is allocated to the order or delivery when the
batch is completed.
• Oracle Order Management
• Oracle Shipping Execution
No update in R12. Terminology
Term Definition
Warehouse Management The Oracle Warehouse Management System (WMS) is a

System (WMS) component of Oracle’s Supply Chain Management and
Manufacturing solution. It spans the areas of warehouse
resource management, warehouse configuration, task
management, advanced pick methodologies, and value added
services.
License Plate Numbers The license plate number is a unique identifier of a container
(LPN’s) in the Supply Chain. The contents of the container are
tracked by this identifier. LPN’s are used to store and transact
inventory throughout the supply chain. The license plate may
represent a pallet, truck, or storage location. There may be
several items and lots in a LPN.
8.12. Oracle Purchasing Integration

8.12.1. Overview
As a result of the inventory convergence project, the integration between Process
Inventory and Oracle Purchasing has been removed and the single inventory application,
Oracle Inventory, is the one source of all material management information. Key areas
that have been enhanced for Purchasing include integration to Process Quality for
receiving inspection. Process users can leverage all of the functionality in Purchasing,
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Purchasing Integration 145
such as consigned and vendor managed inventory, enhanced drop shipments, and global
procurement/shared services, as well as Warehouse Management System functions.
8.12.2. Features
8.12.2.1. Converged Inventory Modifications to Purchasing

Since Purchasing and Receiving integrated to Process Inventory for inventory
organizations that were flagged as “process-enabled”, this integration is removed and
replaced with similar logic now included in Oracle Inventory. Specifically, the following
areas are modified:
• Item entry and order quantity validation – All items are validated against the central
item master in Oracle Inventory. Items can now be defined as “dual unit of measure
controlled” and the logic to determine a required secondary quantity are based on the
settings in the Oracle Inventory item master. Similarly, lot control, grade control and
status control are established here and the corresponding settings are used throughout
Purchasing and Receiving.
• Pricing and Acquisition Costs – Purchasing users can establish price lists and
acquisition costs through the Advanced Pricing application. The ability to set up
supplier price lists was introduced in 11i.10 and the functionality for acquisition costs
is new to R12 (see the RCD for Oracle Purchasing for additional detail). Process
manufacturers can take advantage of the full pricing functionality offered by Oracle
Purchasing for both price lists and acquisition costs. The set up of acquisition costs
includes designating Process Costing attributes for cost component class and analysis
code. Acquisition costs are applied to a receipt using discounts and surcharges
established in Advanced Pricing, or through freight cost integration through Oracle
Transportation. Process Manufacturers can implement Advanced Pricing and/or
Oracle Transportation to automatically compute the acquisition costs for a receipt.
• Vendor-Managed and Consigned Inventory – Process manufacturers can designate
items as vendor-managed or consigned inventory through the Approved Supplier
List. This allows suppliers to initiate replenishment through the iSupplier Portal for
inventory that they manage. For consigned inventory, a bill-only purchase order is
created for consumed inventory, while the original purchase order is used only for
receipt of the material.
• Receiving – For items tracked in two units, the received quantities are maintained for
both units. When receiving is used with Warehouse Management, then putaway
rules, License Plate Numbers and mobile transactions can be implemented.
• Material status and grade – Material status and grade have been migrated to Oracle
Inventory. Status and grade are assigned during receipt – grade can be assigned to
each lot, while status is taken from either the shipping organization or the item master
(the default status). The preferred grade from the purchase order line is used for
information only and can be communicated to the supplier.
8.12.2.2. Enhanced Receiving Inspection

When a receipt containing Process items is routed for inspection, OPM Quality
requirements can be enforced before the goods can be delivered to inventory. This
inspection point allows a visual inspection by the receiving clerk in Oracle Quality as
well as a more detailed sample analysis by a lab technician in OPM Quality. Upon
receipt, a workflow notification is sent to take a sample based on a supplier specification
validity rule defined in OPM Quality. This enhanced solution leverages the Oracle
Quality skip receipt inspection rules, while enforcing a mandatory collection plan.
Through this interface, the receiving clerk can see status updates and the acceptability of
the sample analysis. Based on the outcome of inspection, the user updates the accepted
and rejected quantities of the receipt in the collection plan, which in turn updates Oracle
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Purchasing Integration 146
Purchasing. After inspection, the appropriate quantities can be inventoried or returned to
the supplier.
8.13. Oracle E-Records

8.13.1. Overview
The Oracle E-Business Suite 11i provides a complete set of tools for managing electronic
records, in accordance with the technical requirements in 21 CFR Part 11, including
strong security, audit trails, archiving, operational system checks built into GxP-critical
business flows and electronic signatures.
Oracle® E-Records is a configurable framework for securely capturing, storing, inquiring
and printing electronic records and electronic signatures (ERES) in compliance with
government regulations, such as the United States Food and Drug Administration’s 21
CFR Part 11. Oracle E-Records is part of the Oracle E-Business Suite, an integrated set
of applications that are engineered to work together.
8.13.2. Features
8.13.2.1. Enable Electronic Recordkeeping for SSWA Applications

In prior releases, Oracle E-Records was able to work with Forms-based applications in
the Oracle E-Business Suite. Now, Self Service Web Applications (a.k.a. SSWA or
Oracle Applications Framework) can be able to leverage electronic records and
signatures functionality, as well. This extends the breadth of applications in which you
can leverage electronic recordkeeping.
8.13.2.2. Electronic Recordkeeping for Mobile Transaction Framework

Enhancements have been incorporated into Oracle E-Records and the Mobile Web
Applications (MWA) Server to support 21 CFR Part 11-compliant electronic
recordkeeping with electronic signatures on mobile devices.
To support mobile users, a streamlined signing process has been enabled to support the
needs to mobile users and to fit on the smaller mobile displays. The enablement of the
individual mobile transactions to leverage this feature will be phased in during
subsequent releases.
• Workflow
 Business Event System
 Notification System
• Business Event System
• Oracle Approvals Management
• XML Gateway
• XML Publisher
8.13.4. Terminology
Term Definition
ERES Electronic Records and Signatures
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle E-Records 147
9. New and Changed Features in Manufacturing Operations
Center
9.1. Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center –

9.1.1. Overview
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center (MOC) is a solution built on next generation
Manufacturing Operations architecture, leveraging the ISA-95 reference model. The
solution integrates and provides a common ground between the periodic and transactional
world of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) and the real-time, fragmented world of
shop floor manufacturing equipment and systems. This combination of real-time data
matched with the ERP-based business context enables Oracle Manufacturing Operations
Center to deliver increased visibility, sophisticated operational analytics, and
standardized and simplified integration between the enterprise and Shop Floor.
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center connects to the existing infrastructure on the
plant floor, gathers raw data and builds business context around it by leveraging
information available in ERP and Manufacturing Execution Systems (MES) applications
◌۟ and converts it into useful information for business users. The solution not only enables
Plant Managers and their staff to monitor production operations in real-time, but also
builds a foundation for running Continuous Improvement (CI) programs such as Lean
and Six Sigma.
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center combines the advantages of a prebuilt solution
with those of highly flexible extensibility in three important areas:
• An industry standard data model based, combined with a strong extensibility
framework.
• Prebuilt integrations, both down to the shop floor and up to the ERP, with
capabilities for extension and modification.
• Prebuilt Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and analytics, delivered in Oracle’s
industry leading Business Intelligence (BI) technology enabling rapid extension
and configuration.
9.1.2. Release 12.1.1
9.1.2.1. Open, Flexible Data Model

The core component of Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center is a generic data model
that is open and extensible to meet the requirements of different industries. The data
model is loosely based on ISA-95 reference model and provides a good hierarchical
structure for reporting or building KPIs and metrics that can be analyzed along different
dimensions. The Data model is generic enough to support different modes of
manufacturing such as Discrete, Flow Manufacturing and Process Industries.
9.1.2.2. Customer Specific Process Parameter Monitoring Support

The data model also leverages Extensible Attributes Framework, a component leveraged
across other Oracle products such as Oracle PIM Data Hub that makes it open and
flexible to capture additional parameters with respect to entities such as Product,
Equipment and Work Orders. The BI metadata is enhanced to build custom reports for
the process parameters that are captured for equipment entity like monitoring the
pressure, temperature, etc. against the specifications setup.
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center – 148
9.1.2.3. ERP Data Adaptor
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center utilizes Oracle Warehouse Builder (OWB) to
deliver data integration mappings for extracting data from Oracle EBS. In this release, the
mappings cover Organizations, Shifts, Items, Item Category, Item Costs, Resource,
Resource Group, Resource Cost, released work orders/ flow schedules, Operations,
Material Requirements, and Resource Requirements from Discrete Manufacturing.
9.1.2.4. Hierarchical Dimensions

The analytical data model in Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center is built around
three key dimensions—Time (Calendar), Product, and Equipment. For each dimension,
there are seeded hierarchies provided out of the box. In addition, customers can build
their own hierarchies that are flexible and multi-level. Multiple hierarchies can co-exist in
the system.
9.1.2.5. Data Integration with Other Transactional Systems

Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center utilizes metadata-driven Oracle Warehouse
Builder to deliver ETL mappings for extracting data from other transaction systems such
as Manufacturing Execution Systems (MES), Quality or Maintenance Systems. The data
goes through the common staging and loading infrastructure whether it comes from
Oracle E-Business Suite (EBS) or other transactional systems.
9.1.2.6. Device Connectivity

Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center provides wide range of options for collecting
shop floor data, directly from Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) systems, and Distributed Control Systems
(DCSs). For example,
• Leverage partner solutions from Kepware Technologies, Matrikon and ILS
technologies to collect, aggregate and feed real-time sensor data into Oracle
Manufacturing Operations Center from OPC (Open Connectivity) servers. These
partner solutions would be enhanced by the vendors and certified to work with
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center.
• Leverage existing connectivity options on the shop floor to feed equipment data
directly into Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center by leveraging the interface
table.
• Leverage Oracle Fusion Middleware components such as Enterprise Service Bus
(ESB) and BPEL and Oracle Warehouse Builder (OWB) tool to extract data and
process into Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center.
9.1.2.7. Device Data Management and Contextualization

One of the core strengths of Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center is the ability to
convert highly granular tag data from devices into meaningful business data for reporting
to business users such as Plant Managers and VP of Operations. Oracle Manufacturing
Operations Center has a Contextualization engine and functionality to define business
meanings and processing rules for various types of tag data.
9.1.2.8. Time Zone Conversion

MOC provides Oracle Warehouse Builder APIs to convert data in different time zone
into common time zone when they are loaded into MOC. By this way users can have the
MOC installed locally or centrally and can bring the data from corporate systems and
local systems without much problem on the time-zone conversion using this API.
9.1.2.9. Error Handling
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center provides the infrastructure to capture and
process errors at every stage of data collection. Oracle Warehouse Builder allows
customers to define custom business rules to filter the data in Oracle Manufacturing
Operations Center.
9.1.2.10. Role-based Dashboards

The primary objective of Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center is to bring together
data from disparate sources into a single role-based dashboard allowing Plant Managers
and their staff to view manufacturing operations efficiently and effectively. Oracle
Manufacturing Operations Center leverages Oracle’s state-of-the-art BI platform from
Oracle Fusion Middleware to deliver dashboards that are easy to use and easy to
personalize. The open and flexible BI technology from Oracle Fusion Middleware also
makes it easier for users to build new KPIs and dashboards or modify existing ones. The
following are the dashboard pages and reports made available for Plant Managers:
Dashboard Pages Reports
Asset Performance (OEE) Overall Equipment Effectiveness by Plant
Overall Equipment Effectiveness Bottom Performers (by
Department)
Overall Equipment Effectiveness by Plant
Overall Equipment Effectiveness by Department
Overall Equipment Effectiveness Trend by Plant
Overall Equipment Effectiveness Trend by Department
Asset Performance (OEE) Overall Equipment Effectiveness by Department
by Equipment Overall Equipment Effectiveness Bottom Performers (by
Equipment)
Overall Equipment Effectiveness by Department
Overall Equipment Effectiveness by Equipment
Overall Equipment Effectiveness Trend by Department
Overall Equipment Effectiveness Trend by Equipment
Equipment Downtime Equipment Downtime Analysis
Analysis Equipment Availability Ratio Trend
Equipment Downtime Downtime Reasons
Reasons
Production Slippage Trend Production Slippage Trend
Production Loss Analysis Production Loss Distribution

OEE time Analysis
Production Loss Analysis
Production Loss Detail Production Loss Detail
Equipment Efficiency Equipment Efficiency Analysis
Analysis Equipment Performance Ratio Trend
Equipment Efficiency Equipment Efficiency Detail
Detail
Equipment Scrap Analysis Equipment Scrap Analysis
First Pass Yield Trend
Equipment Scrap Reasons Equipment Scrap Reasons
Batch Performance Production Variance by Product Category

Production Variance by Product
PPM Trend (Month to Date)
Batch Cycle Time Trend (Month to Date)
Service Level Performance by Product Category
Service Level Performance by Product
Batch Performance Detail Batch Performance Detail
Production Performance Performance to Schedule by Plant
Performance to Schedule by Department
Performance to Schedule by Equipment
Production Slippage by Equipment
Current Month Production Slippage Trend by Department
Current Month Production Slippage Trend by Equipment
9.1.2.11. Manufacturing Operations Center Catalog - KPIs and Metrics

Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center helps deliver operational intelligence in a
number of performance areas related to manufacturing operations based on the rich
analytics layer provided by BI technology. Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center
delivers key performance indicators (KPIs) in the following performance areas:
Manufacturing Asset Performance or Production Loss Analysis
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center delivers a complete analytics framework for
VPs of Operations and Plant Managers to assess the performance of their
manufacturing assets. Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) is a popular
framework for analyzing various reasons for loss of production capacity such as
• Downtime losses due to planned or unplanned downtime
• Uptime losses due to reasons such as “Operator on break”, “Waiting for
material” or “Set up time”.
• Efficiency losses
• Quality Losses
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center provides a complete framework to capture
OEE at equipment level and roll it up all the way to the plant and enterprise.
Schedule Adherence
Schedule Adherence refers to a set of KPIs that help users understand the
performance of manufacturing operations against a production schedule that may
originate in an Oracle ERP system or in an external third-party system including
spreadsheets.
Batch Analyzer
Batch Analyzer refers to a set of KPIs that help understand the perfect manufacturing
order performance or performance of a specific work order or batch against its
defined objectives.
SPC/SQC
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center supports an extensible attribute framework
to capture machine or line specific parameters. Machine parameters can also be
charted on SPC charts along with their control limits. Oracle Manufacturing
Operations Center supports most of the standard SPC/SQC charts.
Plant Maintenance
Complementary to the Manufacturing Asset Performance KPIs, the Plant
Maintenance KPIs help users understand the reasons for unplanned downtime and the
effects of lost production capacity due to unplanned downtime.
Quality
Quality KPIs help users understand and pin point locations of and reasons for scrap
and defects inside a plant.
Cost
Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center supports some cost-specific KPIs but
mostly depends on ERP systems or corporate data warehouses to deliver this
information.
Manufacturing Service Levels
Manufacturing Service Level KPIs measure performance against order ship dates.
9.1.3. Release 12.1.2
9.1.3.1. Certification with Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12.0.6

With this release, Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center is now certified to work with
Release R12.0.6 of E-Business Suite, Discrete and Process Manufacturing for collections.
Please note that MOC is a standalone edge product and requires the latest release of EBS
foundation on top of which the MOC patch gets applied. However, the EBS source
instance where either Discrete or Process Manufacturing is running can be on older
releases. The integration between MOC and EBS, which was earlier certified to work
with Release 11.5.10 of the source EBS instance, is now also certified for R 12.0.
9.1.3.2. Event Management Framework

Event Management Framework is a new feature in release 12.1.2 of MOC that reduces
reaction time between event happening in shop floor and response for the same event,
either automatically or manually initiated. Key capabilities that Event Management
Framework adds to MOC are as follows:
• Setup and configuration of event conditions, based on KPI thresholds or real-time
data from shop floor
• Handling actions based on both internal and external events in MOC, such as
sending mobile alerts, e-mails, or calling an external API to initiate a process
such as creating maintenance work request.
• Persistent storage of events for review and reporting
Event Setup and Configuration
Users can define different types of events based on event conditions such as
equipment down, control limit warning etc. Defined events can then be linked to
event actions such as “Creation of a Work Request in Oracle EAM” or general
notifications using mobile alerts or e-mail to production supervisor or maintenance
personnel.
Support for Externally Generated Events
Events can also be generated outside of MOC and imported into MOC for persistent
storage and action handling. For example, any alarm or fault occurring on equipment
can be brought into MOC for, notifications or other action, storage and analysis
purposes.
Actions on Internal/External Events
MOC provides a common action-handling framework that can process both internal
and external events. Internal events are generated based on raw data coming from
shop floor via an OPC server (provided by Oracle partners such as Kepware,
Matrikon or ILS). In addition to seeded actions such as “Creation of Work request in
EAM”, MOC would also support BPEL allowing customers to build custom actions.
Visibility to Events on Dashboards
MOC analytics repository has been enhanced to provide users capability to design
their own reports and dashboard based on the event history.
9.1.3.3. EBS Adapter for Process Manufacturing

In this release, Oracle MOC can collect data from Oracle 11.5.10 E-Business suite for
Process Manufacturing (OPM). The entities that can be collected from OPM are:
• OPM Items and Item Hierarchies
• OPM Resources along with Resource Hierarchies
• Process Batch and Material Produced
• Sales Orders pegged to Process Batches
This feature was previously released with Manufacturing Operations Center Release
12.1.1.01.
9.1.3.4. EBS Adapter Enhancement for Discrete Manufacturing

In this release, the EBS adapter is enhanced to collect data for following entities from
11i10 release of Oracle Discrete and Flow Manufacturing:
• Item Cost–this collects the latest item cost to add monetary value to material
production.
• Resource Cost–this collects the latest resource cost to add monetary value to
resource usage.
• Sales Orders pegged to Work Orders and Flow Schedules
12.1.1.01.
9.1.3.5. Production Quality Monitoring

A new extensible attribute entity Batch Operations is added to collect and maintain
production quality information from external data sources like LIMS and other quality
systems. This entity will help to analyze the samples results against the specifications.
This is a data model enhancement, so customers need to customize by building adapters
to the quality systems and modify the OBIEE repository to enable reporting.
12.1.1.01.
9.1.3.6. Item Category Enhancement

Oracle MOC now collects Item Category segments from EBS along with the categories
to provide additional attributes for analyzing the data.
12.1.1.01.
9.1.3.7. Production Performance Reporting
Oracle MOC enables users to track the operation cycle time and its components of Run,
Idle and Down Time contributions. These metrics are calculated based on the equipment
status and output it produces during the period. The following are the metrics that are
added for production performance monitoring:
• Cycle Time (Hours)
• Average Cycle Time (Hours)
• Run Time during Cycle (Hours)
• Idle Time during Cycle (Hours)
• Down Time during Cycle (Hours)
12.1.1.01.
9.1.4. Release 12.2.1
9.1.4.1. ODI based Data Integration Platform
With Release 12.2.1, Oracle Manufacturing Operations Center supports new technical
stack for data integration that is Oracle Data Integrator (ODI). The OWB Maps and
Process flows of R12.1.3 are either converted into equivalent ODI scenarios or
concurrent programs.
There is an improved Data Integration with Oracle EBS, Flat files and Device Tags
• EBS Adapters for Releases 12.2.1, 12.1.3 and 12.0.6
• All Manufacturing Methods- Discrete, Process, Flow, Repetitive
• Items and Item Hierarchies
• Resource and Resource Hierarchies
• Work Orders, Batches and Material Produced
• Sales Orders pegged to Work Orders/Process Batches
• Flat file based data collection with over 40 templates
• Data collection from Tags
9.1.4.2. Recalculation
The earlier version of MOC didn’t allowed users to correct or update any past status or
output data. The new Recalculation feature enables recalculation of the past data for
specific equipment or all equipment in a plant.
The users can perform recalculation for Equipment Output, Equipment Status or both
Equipment Output and Status.
The procedure involves uploading new Status or Output Flat file to File Location and
running ODI Scenario for Re-processing. Once the scenario completes, users can query
the Status or Output tables, Summary table and, Tag Reason Readings tables to review
the updates.
9.1.4.3. Error Reprocessing
This feature provides the capability to correct the errors encountered during loading of
data through Flat Files or collected from source systems (such as Oracle E-Business
Suite) using a simple WebADI based template. End users responsible for data upload do
not require database access to correct the wrongly entered data.
The users can download the WebADI template by clicking on ‘Reprocess Error Records’
link in the ‘Manufacturing Operations Center Administrator’ responsibility. After
downloading the template for a particular error table, the users can correct the data,
resubmit the records and run the ODI Package corresponding to the entity.
9.1.4.4. Asset Performance Dashboard

A new role-based dashboard for Plant Managers and Maintenance Managers that provides
insight on 360o view of equipment performance of production and non production assets
in a manufacturing plant or a maintenance facility.
Dashboard Page Reports

Production Assets Page Events, Asset Detail Status Trend, Asset
Downtime Analysis, Asset Production
Performance, Asset Output and Scrap and
Asset Operational Parameters for
Production Assets
Non Production Assets Page Events, Asset Detail Status Trend, Asset
Downtime Analysis, Asset Operational
Parameters for Non-Production Assets
9.1.4.5. Production Supervisor Dashboard

A new role-based dashboard for production supervisors to enable real-time tracking of
equipment output, status and exceptions for all equipment in the plant. Following Reports
are available in this dashboard:
• Alert for High Scrap
• Equipment Status- Latest Equipment Status, Time of Last Status Change
and Time Since Last Status Update
• Equipment Production Performance- Actual Production with respect to
Scheduled Production. Catch up Rate indicates the production rate to meet
scheduled production target
• Equipment Status Analysis- The breakup of Down, Idle and Run time hours
for equipment within a plant
• Equipment Status Trend- Displays Equipment Run, Idle and Down trend for
all reading times for time period selected
• Equipment Output Trend- Displays trend of Completed, Scrap quantity for
an equipment for all reading times for time period selected
• Equipment Downtime Analysis-Breakup of downtime reasons for all reading
times for time period selected
9.1.4.6. Support for Oracle Business Intelligence Mobile

Oracle Business Intelligence Mobile (BI Mobile) is an application that allows users to
view Oracle BI EE content on supported mobile devices such as the Apple iPhone and
Apple iPad. Users can view and analyze BI content such as analyses, dashboards, BI
Publisher content, scorecard etc.
This application can be downloaded from Apple iTunes App Store. This feature is
available only in Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition 11 g Release 1 (11.1.1)
onwards.
MOC’s dashboards such as Plant Manager, Facility Manager can be viewed on Apple
iPad and Apple iPhone by using Oracle BI Mobile.
9.1.5. Release 12.2.3
9.1.5.1. Enhanced Inbound Integration with Oracle EBS

With this release the new entities collected from Oracle EBS are:
• Resource instances as Equipment within MOC
• Work Order/Process Manufacturing batches reference data
• Operations
• Activities
• Resource requirements
• Resource instance schedules/ Equipment production schedules
• Material consumed
9.1.5.2. Outbound Integration with Oracle EBS-Discrete Manufacturing

Out-of-box outbound integration provided by MOC creates the following discrete job
transactions:
• Move transaction
• Completion Transaction
• Resource Transaction
Move Transactions
• MOC tags for Completed, Scrap, Rejected Quantities create corresponding move
transactions in Oracle WIP
• The Move Transaction from ‘To Move’ of current operation to the ‘Queue’ of
next operation should be manually done by users in EBS
Completion Transactions
• The various operations supported for Completion Transaction in Oracle WIP
using Output Quantity, Scrap and Rejected quantity tag are: To Move ,
Completion Transaction
• Completion Transaction can only be done for last segment of Job
Resource Transactions
• The Status tags from shop floor get processed as resource transactions in MOC
and create resource transactions in Oracle EBS. The transaction posted is for run
hours of the resource.
9.1.5.3. Outbound Integration with Oracle EBS-Process Manufacturing

Out-of-box outbound integration provided by MOC creates the following OPM batch
transactions:
• Material transactions are created for the product in OPM batch
• Resource transactions are created for the batch step activities
9.1.6. Release 12.2.4
9.1.6.1. Equipment Summary Table for Extensible Attributes

Before this release, MOC maintained only the equipment status and equipment output
summary information. This summary is held at the level of Item, Work order, Workday
Shift and Hour. With this release, a new equipment summary table is created to store
summarized information of extensible attributes.
9.1.6.2. Mathematical functions for Extensible Attributes

Users can setup mathematical functions for an extensible attribute using a new page.
These attributes get summarized on an hourly basis by the ‘MTH: Process Transactions’
concurrent program and the summarized data is maintained in a new equipment extensible
attribute summary table The new table and columns are made available in the OBIEE
layer for reporting purpose.
9.1.7. Release 12.2.5
9.1.7.1. Operations based Equipment Standard Rate

Equipment standard rate can be setup at routing operation (segment) level. The standard
rate defined at the level of equipment or equipment and item is cascaded to all workday
shifts and equipment shifts. The equipment standard rate flat file, staging table, fact and
error table are enhanced to include segment column.
9.1.7.2. Reason Codes for Run Time

Reason codes can be associated with equipment run time status in addition to downtime
status, idle status and scrap that existed earlier. Equipment Runtime Analysis dashboard
allows the user to analyze runtime transactions by runtime reasons.
9.1.7.3. Process Engineer Dashboard

A new dashboard called Process Engineer enables the plant engineers to monitor the trend
of critical process parameters and draw correlation between equipment output, equipment
status and process parameters.
Parameter Hourly Run Chart displays the values of the summarized extensible attribute on
an hourly basis. Equipment Output-Process Analysis report displays the hourly values of
the summarized extensible attribute(s) along with the output summary information. The
report can be run for multiple attributes and a specific date. The data from the output
summary such as completed quantity, scrap quantity, output quantity, etc, are also
displayed for correlation between equipment output and process parameters. Equipment
Status-Process Analysis report displays the hourly values of the summarized extensible
attribute(s) along with status summary information. The report can be run for a multiple
attributes and a specific date. The data from the status summary such as Up hours, Down
hours, Idle hours are displayed for correlation between equipment status and process
parameters.
9.1.7.4. Context Update for Tag Entries

Customers can capture the process parameters from the shop floor equipment. The
frequency of data capture can be up to the minute level. In case of tag based
contextualization, the context details have to be provided using tags. Context information
(Workorder, segment, item), being a business information, is maintained in the ERP
system and is either difficult to interface from plant automation control systems or
cumbersome to be provided at a frequency of equipment tags (minutes or seconds). To
address this business requirement wherein the Workorder, segment and item contexts
might have been unassigned in the previous runs of tag data collection, new ODI artifacts
are provided. This updates context details for extensible attribute records in a batch mode.
9.1.8. Release 12.2.6
9.1.8.1. Archiving and Purging

Shop floor systems can send tag data to MOC for equipment status, equipment output, and
equipment production parameters at a high sub-second frequency. This causes a large
volume of time series data to reside in MOC. With this new feature, a concurrent program
can be scheduled to archive the collected tag data at periodic intervals. If the data needs to
be deleted permanently, the purge concurrent program can be scheduled to delete data
from the archived tables based on selection criteria.
9.1.9. Release 12.2.7
9.1.9.1. Support for Mass Upload of Attribute Summary Function

Creation of extensible attributes along with its summary functions is manual and takes lot
of time. An ODI scenario is now available to mass upload the extensible attributes using a
csv. The ODI scenario will upload the records in the csv into the system minimizing the
setup time.
9.1.9.2. ODI Scenario to Generate Shifts

On a regular basis, the administrator has to generate shifts either using an UI or uploading
the time periods using a CSV. The generation of shifts can now be automated by
scheduling an ODI scenario to create shifts. The ODI scenario takes site, start date and end
date as input parameters.
9.1.10. Terminology
Term Definition
Contextualization The data stored in PLCs as tags is at a granular level and
lacks the required context. For tag or PLC data to be used for
transactions or business intelligence purposes, it needs to be
contextualized or converted into meaningful data
Control Charts Control charts are standard metrics prescribed by SPC/SQC
to monitor processes and determine if they are under control.
Each process parameter has defined upper and lower control
limits; the process is under control as long as the parameter
values are within these two control limits.
A data historian is like a video tape, in a closed circuit
Data Historian security system. The historian stores every event and every
tag value as it changes over time. Historians are more
commonly used in the process industries than Discrete. There
are lots of packaged historians out there, most popular being
Pi from OSISOFT and inTouch from Wonderware. Every
automation vendor has a data historian to offer such as iFix
and iHistorian from GE Fanuc and RSView32 from
Rockwell.
Device This term is typically used for PLCs or any other type of
devices such as sensors, counters, and bar code readers that
can serve as means for collecting MOC data.
EMI Enterprise Manufacturing Intelligence or EMI is a term
coined by AMR Research to designate Manufacturing
Intelligence solutions that specifically focus on the plant floor
and provide details about performance of various types of
equipments at the plant floor. The term typically implies 3
things:
• Connection to the plant floor including lowest level plant
floor systems such as PLCs, SCADA and other types of
control systems,
• Monitoring plant performance in real time, and
• Providing a foundation for running continuous
improvement programs such as OEE< lean and six sigma.
Equipment One of the key models in S -95 and also a very commonly
Hierarchy referred one.
ISA -95 A standard for Enterprise to control system integration that
includes batch, continuous and discrete industries. Managed
by ISA (Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society),
ISA -95 defines terminology, functional requirements, and
borrows or is based on PRM (Purdue Reference Model) for
manufacturing.
KPI Key Performance Indicators are quantifiable measurements
reflecting the critical success factors of an organization. They
differ depending on the organization.
Machine, Asset or The actual machine on which manufacturing activity is
Equipment performed. This document deals strictly with production
equipments only. Other types of assets such as conveyor
belts, carousels used in warehouses or other such material
handling equipments are in scope, as far as this solution is
concerned. Usually these are the lowest level entities in the
equipment hierarchy.
MES Manufacturing Execution System is used for a class of mid-
level systems that operate between ERP and the shop floor.
These systems typically belong to an enterprise class of
software, but provide a deeper view of the manufacturing
execution process on the shop floor.
MOC Manufacturing Operations Center (MOC)
ODI Oracle Data Integrator
ODI Agent An Agent is a run-time component of ODI that orchestrates
the integration process by sending commands to data servers,
the operating systems, or other technologies.
ODI CKM The CKM (Check Knowledge Module) is in charge of
checking that records of a data set are consistent with defined
constraints they can check either an existing table or the
temporary "I$" table created by an IKM.
CKM operates in both STATIC_CONTROL and
FLOW_CONTROL
In STATIC_CONTROL mode, the CKM reads the

constraints of the table and checks them against the data of
the table. Records that don’t match the constraints are written
to the "E$" error table in the staging area.
In FLOW_CONTROL mode, the CKM reads the constraints
of the target table of the Interface. It checks these constraints
against the data contained in the "I$" flow table of the staging
area. Records that violate these constraints are written to the
"E$" table of the staging area.
ODI Datastore In ODI the data is handled through tabular structures defined
as datastores.
ODI Interface An Interface is an ODI object that defines the rule to load one
target data store with the data from one or more source data
stores. A declarative design is used to implement the
transformations as mappings.
ODI Knowledge A knowledge module is a code template containing the
Module sequence OS commands necessary to carry out a data
integration task.
ODI Mapping A mapping is a business rule implemented as a SQL clause. It
is a transformation rule that maps columns in source data
stores onto one of the target data store columns. It is executed
by a relational database server at run time.
ODI Model A Model is a description of a relational data model. It is a
group of data stores stored in a given schema on a given
technology.
ODI Package A package is a predefined sequence of steps, designed to be
executed in order. They are many types of steps, such as:
Interfaces, Procedures, Actions/evaluations on variables,
Actions on models/sub-models/datastores, OS Commands,
ODI Tools
ODI Scenario A scenario is a partially generated code (SQL, shell, etc) for
the objects (interfaces, procedures, etc.) contained in a
package.
OEE The Overall Equipment Effectiveness measure is the basic
building block of a manufacturing improvement approach
called total productive manufacturing or TPM. Developed by
the Japanese in the 1960’s, TPM is a shop floor-focused
improvement program whose primary objective is to
maximize OEE. The 3 performance elements of OEE are
clearly influenced by numerous events —or losses as they are
known. For example, availability may be lost because of
breakdowns, material shortages, or operator absence. Each of
these will account for a proportion of the loss, and each can
be measured in percentage terms. By understanding both the
types of loss and their duration, operators can focus their
improvement activities on areas that will give the greatest
benefits.
OPC OLE for Process Control (OPC) is a set of standard interfaces
based upon Microsoft's OLE/COM technology. The
application of the OPC standard interface makes possible
interoperability between automation/control applications,
field systems/devices, and so forth.
PLC A type of industrial controller. Originally, industrial
automation was implemented with discrete relays and timers,
which were connected together with copper wire. Using this
type of automation structure had a serious disadvantage: to
change the function (or logic) of the control system, the
system had to be literally rewired. Rewiring is time -
consuming and expensive. PLCs were invented to replace
these banks of relays in semi automated factories, notably
automobile plants in the late 1960s. The programming
method that most PLCs use is called ladder logic. Scan rates
are critical for a PLC, because PLCs constantly read (scan) all
points, process logic, and then write to all points. Most PLCs
run on a proprietary network.
SCADA (SCADA) Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. A
computer system for gathering and analyzing real time data.
SCADA systems are used to monitor and control a plant or
equipment in industries such as telecommunications, water
and waste control, energy, oil and gas refining, and
transportation. For example: A SCADA system gathers
information such as where a leak on a pipeline has occurred,
transfers the information back to a central site, alerts the
home station about the leak, performs necessary analysis and
control, , and displays the information in a logical and
organized fashion. SCA DA systems can be relatively simple,
such as one that monitors environmental conditions of a small
office building, or incredibly complex such as a system that
monitors all the activity in a nuclear power plant or the
activity of a municipal water system.
Sensor A device that responds to a physical stimulus (heat, light,
sound, pressure, motion, flow, and so on), and produces a
measurable corresponding electrical signal known as
transducer.
SPC/SQC A quality and process control methodology that relies on
control charts to determine if a particular process is under
control. There are standard control charts prescribed by
SPC/SQC for different types of quality and process
parameters.
Tag A term used to represent individual data elements on a PLC.
The tags are configurable and can be programmed using PLC
programming techniques
Transactional A term used for software applications typically meant for
System automating transactions. It can include ERP, MES, and
custom or legacy homegrown applications that operate on a
relational database.

EBS 122 Cum RCD MFG MOC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EBS 122 Cum RCD MFG MOC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EBS 122 Cum RCD MFG MOC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ORACLE E-BUSINESS SUITE

RELEASE CONTENT DOCUMENT

Prepared by Oracle E-Business Suite Product Development

Last Updated: June 9, 2023

Copyright © 2011, 2023, Oracle and/or its affiliates.

2.1. Purpose of Document

Cost accountants, managers, and line of business owners in finance, operations,

The products consist of following components:

3.1.2. Cost Impact Simulator (CIS)

3.1.4. Cost Comparison Tool

3.1.5. Cost Planning for Discrete Industries

Four major components of Cost Planning are

3.1.5.2. Flexible Metadata Definition

3.1.5.3. Cost Plan

Powered by Oracle 12C In-Memory Database option, different departments including

3.1.5.5. OBIEE Profitability Dashboard

Pre-built Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE) dashboards

4.1. Oracle Cost Management

4.1.1.1. Iterative Periodic Average Costing (IPAC) for Brazil

4.1.2.1. Iterative Periodic Average Cost Processor

4.1.2.2. Global Accounting Engine Forward Port to Subledger Accounting

4.1.2.3. Support for Landed Cost Management

4.1.3.1. EMEA Joint Project - Inventory Master Book Report

4.1.3.2. SLA Post Down-time Upgrade as Concurrent Programs

4.1.4. Release 12.1.3

4.1.4.1. Encumbrance Accounting for Purchase Orders with Shop Floor

4.1.5.1. Landed Cost Management support for Project Manufacturing

4.1.1.1. Support for Accrual Reconciliation of Consigned Inventories

4.1.2.1. Item Sub-Elemental Cost Track

4.1.3.1. Enhanced IPV Transfer to Inventory

4.1.4.1. Costing Support for IR-ISO Returns

4.1.4.2. Costing Support for Centralized Procurement to Expense Destinations

4.1.5.1. Costing of IR-ISO Returns with Intransit Support

4.1.5.1. Costing of IR-ISO Cancellation

4.1.5.2. Costing Support for Interorg Transfer of Consigned Material

4.1.6.1. Costing of Partial IR-ISO Cancellation

4.1.6.2. Costing of Interorg Cancellation

4.1.6.1. Improved Logging for Accrual Reconciliation Load Run

4.2. Oracle Process Manufacturing Cost Management

4.2.2.1. Maintain Process and Discrete Costing Applications

4.2.2.2. Costing of Transfers between Discrete and Process Inventory

4.2.2.3. Subledger Accounting replaces MAC

4.2.3.1. OPM Financials: Detailed Subsidiary Ledger Report

4.2.3.2. OPM Financials: Non-Recoverable Taxes Support in Actual Costing

4.2.3.3. OPM Financials: Reconciliation Enhancements in Actual Costing

4.2.4. Release 12.1.1

4.2.4.1. Costed Indented Bill of Materials Report

4.2.5. Release 12.1.2

4.2.5.1. Support for Landed Cost Management

4.2.6.1. Costing and Accounting for Outside Processing

4.2.7.1. Support for Accrual Reconciliation of Consigned Inventories

4.2.8.1. Ability to track Batch Close Variances at Item or Resource Level

4.2.8.2. Early Period Close for Process Organizations

4.2.10.1. Support for running multiple instances of Actual Cost Processor

4.2.11.1. Purge and Archive of Cost Period Data

4.2.12.1. Purge and Archive of Accounting Data

Account Derivation Determines what account is used for each line of

4.3.2.1. Overview Dashboard

4.3.2.2. Inventory Dashboard